CFSU ARUNDEL CENTER TOILET ROOMS RENOVATIONS · Toilet Rooms Renovation, Anne Arundel County, Maryland.” Bids made other than on the attached forms will not be considered. Changes

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY, MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

CFSU ARUNDEL CENTER TOILET ROOMS RENOVATIONS

Project Number: C537800 Proposal/Contract Number: C537861 PROJECT MANUAL

GANNETT FLEMING, INC 7133 Rutherford Road, Suite 300 Baltimore, MD 21244

Bureau of Engineering April 29, 2016

TOC - 1

Revised 3/08

K:\60654 AACDPW\DELIVERABLE\FINAL\AACDPW - ARUNDEL CENTER TOILET ROOMS RENOVATION - FINAL SUBMISSION -

031516\FRONT END SPECS (REVISED) FROM JUDY ON 042716\C537861_46-02 TABLE OF CONTENTS_DRAFT.DOC

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY

CFSU ARUNDEL CENTER TOILET ROOMS RENOVATIONS Proposal No./Contract No.: C537861

Project No.: C537800

TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS ............................................................................................... A1-1 INFORMATION TO BIDDERS INCLUDING EXECUTIVE ORDER 24 ............. A2-1 TO A2-4 SOLICITATION CHECK LIST ............................................................................................... A2-5 AFFIDAVIT .............................................................................................................. A3-1 TO A3-2 PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................... A4-1 TO A4-6 CONTRACT .............................................................................................................. B1-1 TO B1-2 CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE BOND ........................................................... B2-1 TO B2-2 CONTRACTOR'S LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND ........................................... B3-1 TO B3-3 CORPORATE RESOLUTION ..................................................................................................B4-1 BID BOND ................................................................................................................ B5-1 TO B5-2 EXPERIENCE AND EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION .......................................... B6-1 TO B6-4 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS .............................................B7-1 APPENDIX "A" ................................................................................................................. 2 PAGES APPENDIX "B" ................................................................................................................. 3 PAGES

A1-1

Revised 4/6/16

K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-03

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS_draft.doc

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS Bid No.: C537861 Project No.: C537800 Sealed bids, addressed to Anne Arundel County, Bid No. C537861, for CFSU Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation for the Department of Public Works will be received until 1:30 P.M. local time, Tuesday, June 14, 2016, at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, 3rd Floor, Heritage Office Complex, 2660 Riva Road, Annapolis, Maryland 21401, after which they will be publicly opened and read in the Patuxent Conference Room, located on the same floor. The Work includes the following major items: All the toilet rooms on the north and south wing of the building. The work includes renovating the Men’s and Women’s toilet rooms on each floor of the north and south wings, changing the location of the janitor’s closet and adding ADA compliant unisex restroom on each floor of the north wing. The work excludes toilet room in the engineer’s office on the basement floor. To all contractors, Anne Arundel County Purchasing Office now has bid results for Capital Construction Projects as well as Notice to Contractors on the Web Page. Entering http://www.aacounty.org/CentServ/Purchasing/index.cfm can access it. On or after May 9, 2016, Plans and Specifications may be downloaded from the Anne Arundel County Purchasing website listed above. Plans will only be distributed via the web site. This Contract will be constructed under the provisions of the Anne Arundel County Government January, 2001 "Standard Details and Specifications for Construction” and any subsequent revisions thereto. The cost range for the Project is: $1,000,000 to $1,500,000.

EQUAL OPPORTUNITY It is the policy of Anne Arundel County, Maryland, to ensure equal employment opportunity for all persons, and to ensure that minority and women-owned business enterprises have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of all county contracts for supplies and services. NON-DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT THE CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUBCONTRACTOR MAY NOT DISCRIMINATE IN ITS EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES AGAINST ANY EMPLOYEE OR APPLICANT FOR EMPLOYMENT BECAUSE OF RACE, COLOR, RELIGION, SEX, NATIONAL ORIGIN, ANCESTRY, HANDICAP, AGE OR MARITAL STATUS. On May 23, 2016 at 9:00 AM local time, a Pre-Bid conference and Site Visit will be held at the Arundel Center, 44 Calvert Street, Room 161, Annapolis, MD 21401. ALL VISITORS are asked to check in with the first floor security guard and assemble in the lobby area at least ten (10) minutes prior to the meeting. Please be prompt as all potential bidders must be escorted from the lobby to the meeting location. Once the meeting starts personnel may not be available for additional escorts. The intent of this conference is to clarify the Plans and Specifications advertised and intended for bidding purposes. All potential bidders are requested to attend this conference as this will be the only opportunity to tour the Arundel Center prior to submitting the bid. However, attendance is not a requirement of the Contract. Questions regarding this Project should be directed to the PROJECT MANAGER, Judy F. Salter-Brown at 410-266-3703 x1005.

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY Andrew Hime Purchasing Agent

A2-1

Revised 7/8/13

K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs

(revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-04 INFORMATION TO BIDDERS INCLUDING EXECUTIVE ORDER 24_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY, MARYLAND

CFSU Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation Proposal No.: C537861 Project No.: C537800

INFORMATION TO BIDDERS

Sealed bids in duplicate, addressed to the Purchasing Agent, Anne Arundel County, Maryland, for construction of the Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation as shown on drawings on file in the Office of the Department of Public Works, Heritage Office Complex, 2662 Riva Road, Annapolis, Maryland 21401 will be received in the Office of the Purchasing Agent, 3rd Floor, Heritage Office Complex, 2660 Riva Road, Annapolis, Maryland 21401, until June 14, 2016 at 1:30 p.m. Bids will be opened and read aloud in the Patuxent Room located on the same floor, immediately thereafter. THE RIGHT IS HEREBY RESERVED TO REJECT ANY OR ALL BIDS AND TO WAIVE INFORMALITIES, AS THE INTERESTS OF THE COUNTY MAY REQUIRE. All work to be performed under this Project shall be done under strict compliance with the Anne Arundel County Government January 2001 "Standard Details and Specifications for Construction” and any subsequent revisions thereto. Copies of Standard Specifications for Construction and Standard Details may be obtained by accessing the Anne Arundel County Department of Public Works website, http://www.aacounty.org/DPW/Engineering.cfm. The Standard Specifications and Details for Construction will only be available via the web site, and it shall be the duty of the Bidder to be familiar with these documents. In addition, on May 18, 1990, the Commissioner of Labor and Industry adopted, through incorporation by reference to the Maryland Occupation Safety and Health Standards under COMAR 09.12.31 Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act, amendments and revisions relating to Excavations as published in 54 Federal Register No. 209 (October 31, 1989) pages 45948-45991 and codified in Sub Part 29CFR 1926.650-1926.652 and Appendices A-F, together with certain amendments. The amendments are found at Maryland Register, Volume 17, issue 6 (Friday, March 23, 1990), pages 746-748. The Commissioner’s action is effective May 28, 1990. All holders of the Anne Arundel County Standard Specification and Details for Construction should familiarize themselves with these regulations and be guided accordingly. Each bid must be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked “Proposal No. C537861, Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation, Anne Arundel County, Maryland.” Bids made other than on the attached forms will not be considered. Changes in the phraseology of the bid, additions, or limiting provisions will render the bid irregular and may cause its rejection. All bids shall include the following forms, each of which is to be submitted in duplicate:

(1) Anti-collusion and non-bribery affidavit

A2-2

Revised 1/28/14



(2) Proposal form

(3) Bid Bond (Bonding Companies must be licensed to do business in the State of Maryland and have complied with the law and the regulations of the U.S. Department of the Treasury and be approved as A Certified Companies or A Certified Reinsurer Companies.)

(4) List of subcontractors and Equipment Suppliers; and

Failure to complete and submit these forms shall render the proposal irregular and may be cause for rejection of the bid. The Proposal form shall include the price, in figures, for each item of the proposed work and must be signed on behalf of the bidder. The bidder must examine the drawings, standard specifications, standard details and contract specifications carefully, and should make a personal examination of the location and nature of the proposed work. In case doubt shall arise as to the meaning or intent of anything shown on the drawings or comprised in the Standard Specifications, Standard Details and Contract Specifications, inquiry should be made of the project engineer, of the Department of Public Works before the bid is submitted. Submission of the bid shall indicate that the bidder thoroughly understands the drawings and the terms of the specifications. Bidders are especially directed to fill out the “total Price” column and total their bids, so that the results of the bidding, barring possible arithmetical errors, will be at once known. Any errors in computation will be corrected by the engineer when the bids are canvassed. The County reserves the right to accept alternatives in any order, to award on any bid item or combination of bid items. And to reject all bids if, in the sole determination of the County, it is advantageous to the County to do so. Any errors in computation or math will not invalidate the bid. In case of any discrepancy between the total figure and the correct total of the line items on the bid, the correct total of all line items shall govern and shall become the bid price. Each bid must be accompanied by, and have sealed in the same envelope with the bid, a certified check or bid bond acceptable to the County for five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid, payable to Anne Arundel County, Maryland; and unless so accompanied, the bid will not be considered. The check or bid bond will be forfeited to the County as liquidated damages in case the contract, performance bond, and labor and materials bonds are not executed within ten (10) days after receiving the contract for execution. The list of subcontractors and equipment suppliers to be submitted with the bid need only show certified small business, minority business and women business enterprises, which the bidder intends to use. In the event that the bidder cannot participate, the bidder shall include with the bid a notarized affidavit showing the evidence of the effort made to achieve this goal. Failure to submit the list of subcontractors and equipment suppliers delineating SBE, MBE, and WBE participation and/or the good faith documentation at the time the bid is submitted shall render the bid irregular and may be cause for rejection of the bid. The complete list of subcontractors and suppliers will be required from the apparent low bidder within (10) days of a request by the County. The experience and equipment certification is to be submitted to the county by the apparent low bidder within ten (10) calendar days after request from the County.

A2-3

Revised 1/28/14



Each bid must include a signed and notarized affidavit concerning sales and use tax. It is the bidder’s responsibility to contact the State of Maryland, Comptroller of the Treasury, Retail Sales Tax Division, to determine if any portion of the project is exempt from sales use tax. THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER MAY NOT WITHDRAW ITS BID WITHIN NINETY (90) DAYS AFTER BID OPENING. If the bidder, to whom an award is made, shall fail to execute the contract and bonds, the award may be annulled and the contract awarded to the second lowest responsible bidder, and such bidder shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein, as if the bidder were the original party to whom the award was made; or the county may reject all of the bids, as its interests may require. The County will hold the checks and/or bid bonds submitted by all bidders with their bids, until the execution and delivery of the contract and bonds whereupon they shall be returned. As required by the Maryland Law, all foreign corporations doing business within the State of Maryland are required to be registered with the State Department of Assessments and Taxation as a condition precedent to the award of a contract. If the contractor is a corporation, the contract shall be accompanied by a copy of the corporate resolution authorizing the officer of said corporation, whose name appears on the contract, to execute the contract. If a person other than an officer is designated, it must be stated under oath that the person is the agent of the corporation and is duly authorized to act for an in behalf of the corporation. The Bidder must perform 50 percent (50%) of the work with his own forces. Bidders are further reminded of State Finance and Procurement Article, Section 17-106 Annotated Code of Maryland, which provides:

Before a contractor receives a progress or final payment under a contract covered by payment security, the contractor shall certify, in writing that, in accordance with contractual agreements, suppliers, and subcontractors: (1) Have been paid from the proceeds of previous progress payments; and (2) Will be paid in a timely manner from the proceeds of the progress or final payment

currently due.

The contractor shall make available, at anytime to the County, the contractor’s records for the purpose of auditing and/or verifying the contractor’s costs in connection with negotiated contracts, change order, or other amendments to the contract.

A2-4

Revised 1/28/14



Executive Order 24 Pursuant to Executive Order 24, vendors are required to comply with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the employment of aliens. If a vendor fails to comply with applicable laws and regulations relating to employment of aliens, such failure shall constitute a material breach of the vendor’s contractual relationship with the County and shall be grounds for termination of the contractual relationship. By executing this Agreement, the Contractor certifies that it is aware of its obligations under Executive Order 24 and that it complies with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the employment of aliens. Contractor shall include this clause in all subcontracts, making subcontractors subject to these requirements. Non-Discrimination Clauses: Contractor shall comply with Executive Order 11246 entitled “Equal Employment Opportunity” as amended by Executive Order 11375, and as supplemented in U.S. Department of Labor Regulations 41 CFR Part 60.

The Contractor agrees not to discriminate in any manner against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, creed, color, or national origin; and, is obligated to include a similar requirement in all subcontracts, except subcontracts for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. In addition, the contractor and all subcontractors shall agree to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause

Where the Contractor willfully fails to comply with the non-discrimination provisions, the

County may, where the Contract is still executory in part, compel continued performance of the Contract, but he County shall be liable only for the reasonable value of services performed and materials supplied from the date that the breach of contract was discovered, and any sums previously paid by the County under the Contract shall be set off against the sums to become due as the Contract is performed.

If any subcontractor willfully fails to comply with the non-discrimination provisions, the

Contractor may void the subcontract and shall be liable only for the reasonable value of the services performed and materials supplied to the date of the voiding of the subcontract.

As to all contracts for materials, supplies, maintenance, services or other procurements except

building construction services, the vendor agrees not to discriminate in any manner against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, or sex. Any Contract with the County requiring subcontracts shall include similar requirements in each subcontract. The Contractor further agrees to comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and executive orders relating to equal employment opportunity. Equal Opportunity Clause: It is the policy of Anne Arundel County, Maryland, to ensure Equal Employment Opportunity for all persons, and to ensure that Minority and Women-Owned Business Enterprises have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of all County Contracts for supplies and services.

A2-5


Solicitation Check List


______________________________________________________________________

THIS CHECKLIST IS PROVIDED FOR YOUR CONVENIENCE ________ Bid Response/Proposal shall be delivered to the County Purchasing Department

no later than the date and time shown in the Solicitation. Did you visit our website at (http://www.aacounty.org/CentServ/Purchasing/index.cfm) for any addenda, which may have been posted to our website or eMD Marketplace?

________ Did an authorized company representative sign the Bid Response Form? ________ Did an authorized company representative sign and notarize the Affidavit

form(s)? ________ Did you include the required signature authority documents, if required? ________ If you are an entity (limited liability partnerships, corporations, limited

partnerships, limited liability companies, limited liability limited partnerships, business trusts, real estate investment trust and trade name filings), is the legal name of your company listed with the State of Maryland Department of Assessments and Taxation and in good standing? You may check by going to www.sdat.org.

________ If this Solicitation requires a Bid/Proposal bond, did you include one? ________ Did you provide one original and one copy of your response? ________ Is the outside of the submittal envelope marked with the Bid/Proposal Number,

the title, the due date, your company name, and your company address?

MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS

The following item(s) are MANDATORY and shall be submitted, in fully executed format, with Bid Response/Proposal in order to be considered for an award. If the following item(s) are not submitted with the Bid Response/Proposal, the Bid/Response/Proposal shall be considered null and void, and therefore, will be rejected.

(A) Bid Bond or Certified Check (5%) (B) County's Bid Response/Proposal Form

NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED IN DUPLICATE WITH THE BID

A3-1 Revised 11/22/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end spec (affidavit) from Judy on 050316\C537861_46-05 AFFIDAVIT_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY

CFSU Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation Proposal No.: C537861


AFFIDAVIT

On behalf of , I do solemnly declare and affirm,

(Contractor) under penalty of perjury, that to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief:

1. Neither , nor any of its officers, directors, or (Contractor)

partners, or any of its employees who are directly involved in obtaining or performing contracts with the State of Maryland, a unit of the State (as defined in '16-101 of the State Finance and Procurement Article), or a local governmental entity in the State, has:

(a) been convicted of bribery, attempted bribery, or conspiracy to bribe, under the laws of any state or of the federal government;

(b) been convicted under a State or federal law or statute of any offense enumerated in §16-203 of the State Finance and Procurement Article; or

(c) been found civilly liable under a State or federal antitrust statute as provided in §16-203 of the State Finance and Procurement Article.

2. shall not knowingly enter into a contract (Contractor)

with a public body under which a person or business debarred or suspended under Title 16, Subtitle 3 of the State Finance and Procurement Article will provide, directly or indirectly, supplies, services, architectural services, construction related services, leases of real property, or construction.

3. Neither , nor any employee or (Contractor)

representative of : (Contractor)

(a) agreed, conspired, connived, or colluded to produce a deceptive

show of competition in the preparation of the bid or offer being submitted; or


A3-2 Revised 11/22/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end spec (affidavit) from Judy on 050316\C537861_46-05 AFFIDAVIT_draft.doc

(b) has in any manner, directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated

in any collusion to fix the price of the bid or proposal of any bidder or offeror or any competitor, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the contract for which the bid or offer is submitted,

4. The Contractor/Bidder/Offeror: (a) Is not currently identified on the list created by the Maryland State Board of Public works

as a person engaging in investment activities in Iran as described in Section 17-702 of the Maryland State Finance and Procurement Article; and

(b) Is not currently engaging in investment activities in Iran as described in Section 17-702 of

the Maryland State Finance and Procurement Article. If the person is unable to make the certification, it will provide the County, under penalty of

perjury, a detailed description of the Contractor/Bidder/Offeror’s investment activities in Iran.

Contractor/Bidder/Offeror: ______________________________

By: ___________________________________

Printed Name: ___________________________ Printed Title: ____________________________

Date: __________________________________

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public of the State of , County or City of , this day of , .

____________________________________ (Notary Public)

My Commission expires: .


A4-1 Revised 1/10/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-07 PROPOSAL_draft.doc

PROPOSAL

TO ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY, MARYLAND


Made this day of , , by ______________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ Business Address: _________________________________________________________________

We/I the undersigned Bidder declare that the only person, firm, or corporation, or persons, firms, or corporations, that has or have any interest in this Proposal, or in the Contracts proposed to be taken, is or are the undersigned; that this Proposal is made without any connection or collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation making a Proposal for the same work; the undersigned further certifies that they have received Drawings, Specifications, Addenda (if any), and copy of this Proposal and that they constitute all instruments for bidding this contract, and that the Specifications, form of contract and the Drawings, therein referred to, have been carefully examined and are understood; that as careful an examination has been made of the worksite as is necessary to become informed as to the character and extent of the work required; and that is proposed and agreed, if the Proposal is accepted, to Contract with Anne Arundel County, Maryland, in the form of contract hereto attached, to do the required work in the manner set forth in the Specifications and as shown by the Drawings.

If this Proposal shall be accepted by Anne Arundel County, Maryland and the undersigned shall refuse or neglect, within ten (10) days after receiving the Contract for execution, to execute the same and to give the stipulated Bond, then said County may, at its option, determine that the Bidder has abandoned the Contract, and thereupon the Proposal and the acceptance thereof shall be null and void, and the deposit accompanying the Proposal shall be forfeited and paid as liquidated damages to the County. The base bid, unit prices and alternatives on the attached and signed Proposal Form are to include and cover the furnishing of all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus and means for performing the work, and the doing of all the above mentioned work, in the manner set forth, described and shown in the Specifications and on the Contract Drawings within the prescribed number of consecutive calendar days after service of written notice from the Owner to proceed with the work.


A4-2 Revised 1/10/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-07 PROPOSAL_draft.doc

The successful Bidder shall be required to submit a list containing all parties to which he intends to subcontract any portion of the work. The list shall contain the subcontractor's name, address, work to be sublet and business telephone number. (NOTE: The Bidder or Bidders must sign here and the address of each must be given. In the case of firms, the firm name must be signed and subscribed to by at least one member. In the case of corporations, the corporate name must be signed by some authorized officer or agent thereof, who shall also subscribe his name and office. The seal of the corporation shall be affixed. Telephone number to be listed).

The names and addresses of all members of a firm or the names, addresses and titles of every officer of a corporation, or duly authorized agent, as the case may be, must be given here by the member of the firm or by the officer or agent of the corporation who signs the Proposal.

We/I will submit within ten (10) days of request by the county, the Experience and Equipment Certification specified and further understand and are/am aware that the work will be awarded to an approved organization which is properly constituted in experience, capital and equipment.

Prior to, or following, the award of this Contract, the Owner or Engineer may request that We/I supply him with whatever information is needed by him in order to become better familiarized with any of the subcontractors and/or equipment suppliers. It is further stipulated that no change in the names of those persons or organizations will be made unless written application is made with justification and prior approval is granted. It is further agreed that the apparent low bidder will submit within 10 days of a request by the county a detailed list of all subcontractors and equipment suppliers including anticipated dollar values.

We/I agree to accept as full compensation the unit prices stipulated for the contingent construction items that are incorporated into the work by direction of the Engineer in the field.


A4-3 Last Revision: 1/10/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-07 PROPOSAL_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ANNAPOLIS, MARYLAND

Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovations Proposal No.: C537861 Project No.: C537800

DATE: __________________

This is to certify that ________ has received Addendum No. through and this bid reflects the changes created by these addenda. THE CONTRACTOR OR ANY SUBCONTRACTOR ON THIS WORK WILL BE REQUESTED TO COMPLY WITH EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246, ENTITLED "EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY" AS AMENDED BY EXECUTIVE ORDER 11375, AND AS SUPPLEMENTED IN U.S. DEPT. OF LABOR REGULATIONS (41 CRF PART 60). Bidder's Names: __________________________________________________________________ Bidder's Signature: ________________________________________________________________ Bidder's Address: _________________________________________________________________ Telephone Number: ________________________________________________________________



TOILET ROOMS RENOVATION

Bid Item

No.

Description

Unit Size

Estimated Quantity

Unit Price Dols / Cts

Total Price Dols / Cts

1 South Toilet Rooms LS 1 ---

2 North Toilet Rooms LS 1 ---

SUB-TOTAL TOILET ROOMS RENOVATION

ALLOWANCES (Section 011000, paragraph 1.06 C)

Allowance

No.

Description

Unit Size

Estimated Quantity

Unit Price Dols / Cts

Total Price Dols / Cts

1 Asbestos Testing and/or Asbestos Removal

LS 1 --- $10,000.00

2 Building Permit LS 1 --- $7,000.00

SUB-TOTAL ALLOWANCES $17,000.00

CONTINGENCY

Contingency

Item No.

Description Unit

Size Estimated Quantity

Unit Price Dols/Cents

Total Price Dol/Cents

1 Miscellaneous Contingency

LS 1 --- $10,000.00

SUBTOTAL CONTINGENCY $10,000.00

TOTAL BASE BID (Bid items 1 through 2, Allowances + Contingency): __________________ ___________________________________________________$_________________________ BID PRICE MUST BE WRITTEN AND SHOWN IN NUMBERS, IN CASE OF DISCREPANCY THE WRITTEN AMOUNT WILL SUPERSEDE. Total time for completion, 180 consecutive calendar days. Liquidated damages shall be Five Hundred ($500.00) dollars per calendar day.



Basis of Award The award of the Contract shall be in accordance with Section GP 3.0 of the Anne Arundel County Government January 2001 "Standard Details and Specifications for Construction” and any subsequent revisions thereto and based on total Base Bid. _______________________________________________

(Bidder) By: (Title) In accordance with the County Code, Article 8-2-119, please list any affiliation with a County employee(s) or official(s) (Write "none" if there are no affiliations.): _______________________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________

B1-1 Revised 1/5/16 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-08 CONTRACT_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY



CONTRACT

THIS CONTRACT, made this day of the year , by and between ______________________________________________________________________ _________________hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR, and ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY, MARYLAND, a body corporate and politic of the State of Maryland, hereinafter called the COUNTY.

WHEREAS, the Contract for constructing (the project name)_________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________________ shown on Drawings, marked Proposal ___________, on file in the Office of the Department of Public Works, subject to all the conditions, covenants, stipulations, terms and provisions contained in the Special provisions, attached hereto, and the Anne Arundel County Government "Standard Details and Specifications for Construction” issued January 2001, and any revisions thereto, as adopted by the Department of Public Works, said Standard Specifications and Standard Details being in all respect made a part hereof by reference as full and with the same effect as if the same had been set forth in full herein, has recently been awarded to the Contractor by the County at and for the sum equal to the aggregate cost of the work, labor, materials and supplies done or furnished, at the prices and rates respectively named therefore in the proposal attached hereto.

AND WHEREAS, it was one of the conditions of said Award that a formal Contract should be executed by and between the contractor and the County evidencing the terms of said Award.

NOW THEREFORE, THIS CONTRACT WITNESSETH, that the Contractor does hereby covenant and agree with the County that he will well and faithfully construct said ________ __________________ in accordance with each and every one of the conditions, covenants, stipulations, terms and provisions contained in the above-mentioned Specifications, and as shown on said Drawings, at and for a sum equal to the aggregate cost of the work, labor, materials and supplies done and furnished at the prices and rates respectively named therefore in the Proposal attached hereto, that sum being $____________________________(excluding change orders), and will well and faithfully comply with and perform each and every obligation imposed upon him by said Specifications, or the terms of said Award.

The Contractor further agrees that for each and every calendar day that the Contractor is in default in completing the work to be done under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay to the County the sum of _______________________________which sum is hereby agreed upon as liquidated damages as set forth in the Standard Specifications.

B1-2 Revised 1/5/16 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-08 CONTRACT_draft.doc

And the County does hereby covenant and agree with the Contractor that it will pay to the Contractor, when due and payable under the terms of said Specifications and of said Award, the above mentioned sum; and it will well and faithfully comply with and perform each and every obligation imposed upon it by said Specifications or the terms of said Award.

And the Contractor and the County do hereby agree that this Contract constitutes a contract under seal and that they intend the twelve year statute of limitations period to apply, as set forth in Courts & Judicial proceedings Article, §5-102, Annotated Code of Maryland. SERVICE OF PROCESS IN THE EVENT OF SUIT

The Contractor does hereby nominate and appoint __________________________________ _______________________ who actually resides at ______________________________________ _______________________ in the State of Maryland who will accept service both before and after completion of the Contract and under no circumstances is the Contractor to have the right to withdraw or revoke the agency without the prior written permission of the County.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Said _______________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ the Contractor, has hereunto set (his) (its) hand and affixed (his) (its) corporate seal, and the County has caused these presents to be signed and the County has caused its corporate seal to be hereunder affixed, duly attested by the Secretary of the County. WITNESS: _____________________________ (SEAL) Witness (Sign full legal name and title) Contractor (Sign full legal name and title)

_____________________________ (SEAL) Witness (Print full legal name and title) Contractor (Print full legal name and title)

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY, MARYLAND WITNESS: _____________________________ _____________________________________________

Mark D. Hartzell, Chief Administrative Officer Approved as to legal form and sufficiency: ____________________________________ Office of Law Approved for sufficient funds, and encumbrance of same: ____________________________________ Controller

B2-1 Last Revised: 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-09 CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE BOND_draft.doc


Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovations Proposal No.: C537861


CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That _________________________________________________________________________,

as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and _________________________________________, as

Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Anne Arundel County,

Maryland, a body corporate and politic of the State of Maryland, hereinafter called the County, in

the amount of ________________________________________________Dollars ($_________)

(amount to be 100% of Contract Amount), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,

firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a Written Contract dated __________

with the County for Project No.: _______________ Contract No.: ______________which contract is

by reference made a part hereof and hereinafter referred to as the Contract.

NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if the Principal

shall well, truly and properly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions

and agreements of said Contract and of all such alterations and modifications thereof as may

hereafter be made therein, in the manner and to the extent which said Contract provides for such

alterations and modifications, during the original term of said Contract and any extensions thereof

which may be granted by the County and agreed upon by the Principal; and if the Principal shall

B2-2 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-09 CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE BOND_draft.doc

indemnify and save harmless the County from all loss, cost or damage arising out of a default

hereunder or under said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall

remain in full force and effect.

The Surety expressly waives any right to receive NOTICE of extensions of time, or

alterations or modifications of the Contract, which are provided for and made pursuant to the terms

of, said contract.

PROVIDED, HOWEVER, no right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the

use of any person, firm or corporation whatever other than the County named herein, or its

successors in office.

Signed and sealed this day of, _________________________, _________.

In the Presence of: _____________________________________________

(Contractor) WITNESS: _____________________________ ___________________________________ (SEAL) Signature of Principal/Corporate Officer

_____________________________________ (SEAL) Title

_____________________________________________

Surety

By: _________________________________ (SEAL) ___________________________________________ Bond No.

B3-1 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-10 CONTRACTOR'S LABOR & MATERIAL BOND_draft.doc


Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovations Proposal No.: C537861 Project No.: C537800 CONTRACTOR'S LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That __________________________________________________________________, as

Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and _______________________________, as Surety,

hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Anne Arundel County, Maryland, a

body corporate and politic of the State of Maryland, hereinafter called the County, for the use and

benefit of Claimant, as herein below defined, in the amount of

___________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________________)

(amount of bond to be 50% of Contract Amount), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,

firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a Written Contract dated ______________with

the County for Project No.: ______________ Contract No.: _____________ which contract is by

reference made a part hereof and hereinafter referred to as the Contract.

NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if the principal shall

promptly make payment to each and every Claimant, as hereinafter, defined, for all labor, materials,

supplies and rental of equipment reasonably required and used or consumed in the performance of

the Contract and of all such alterations and modifications of said Contract provides for such

alterations and modifications, during the original term of said Contract and any extensions thereof


which may be granted by the County and agreed upon by the Principal, then this obligation shall be

null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect.

The Surety expressly waives any right to receive notice of extensions of time, or alterations

or modifications of the Contract, which are provided for and made pursuant to the terms of, said

Contract.

PROVIDED, HOWEVER, anything in said Contract to the contrary notwithstanding, this

bond is executed upon and subject to the express conditions and limitations of State Finance and

Procurement Article, Section 17-108 and 17-109, Annotated Code of Maryland, as of the date of this

contract wherein it is set forth in pertinent part as follows:

Action on security.

(a) In general. -- Subject to subsection (b) of this section, a supplier may sue on payment security if the supplier:

(1) Supplied labor or materials in the prosecution of work provided for in a

contract subject to this subtitle; and (2) Has not been paid in full for the labor or materials within 90 days after the

day that the person last supplied labor or materials for which the claim is made. (b) Payment owed by subcontractor. –

(1) A supplier who has a direct contractual relationship with a subcontractor

or sub-subcontractor of a contractor who has provided payment security but no contractual relationship with the contractor may sue on the security if the supplier gives written notice to the contractor within 90 days after the labor or materials for which the claim is made were last supplied in prosecution of work covered by the security.

(2) A notice under this subsection:

(i) Shall state with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the

person to whom the labor or material was supplied; and (ii) Shall be sent by certified mail to the contractor at the contractor's

residence or a place where the contractor has an office or does business.


Venue; limitations; costs.

(a) Venue. -- An action on a payment bond required by this subtitle shall be filed in the appropriate court of the county where:

(1) The contract was executed and performed; or (2) The contractor has its principal place of business.

(b) Limitations period. -- An action on a payment bond required by this subtitle shall

be filed within 1 year after the public body finally accepts the work performed under the contract.

Signed and sealed this _____________ day of , .

In the Presence of:

___________________________________________ (Contractor)

WITNESS: _____________________________ (SEAL) Signature of Principal/Corporate Officer

(SEAL) Title

__________________________________________ Surety

By: _________________________________________

_____________________________________________ Bond No.

B4-1 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-11 CORPORATE RESOLUTION_draft.doc




CORPORATE RESOLUTION

RESOLVED, that be, and it is

hereby authorized to do business and enter into contracts and agreements with Anne Arundel

County, Maryland,

RESOLVED, that and who are

respectfully the and , or its duly

authorized agent(s) of the are authorized to file

and sign contracts on behalf of the said Corporation.

AND IT IS FURTHER RESOLVED, that the authority to said officer(s) or agent(s) conferred

by this Resolution shall remain open and good until revoked by a formal action of the Board of

Directors of the Corporation and due notice of such revocation delivered to the Anne Arundel

County, Maryland in writing under the signature of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of this

Corporation, and this authority shall apply to any present or future incumbent of the aforesaid office.

I HEREBY CERTIFY that the above is a true copy of the Resolution of the Board of Directors

of , passed at a meeting of said Board

duly called and held on the day of , , at which meeting a quorum of said

Board of Directors was present and voted.

_________________________________ Secretary

SEAL

*NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED IN DUPLICATE WITH THE BID AND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A VALID POWER OF ATTORNEY.

B5-1 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-12 BID BOND_draft.doc



Project No.: C537800 BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT, that we hereinafter called the "Principal" and

Company Name _________________________________________________________________________________ Surety as Surety ("Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto Anne Arundel County, Maryland, hereinafter called the "Owner" in the penal sum of ___________________________________________ Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly make, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated for the , Anne Arundel County, Maryland.

(Name of Project)

NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified therein after the opening of the same, or, if no period is specified, within ninety (90) days after said opening; and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with the Owner, in accordance with the bid as accepted and give Bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such contract; or in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the period specified or the failure to enter into such contract and give such bond within the time specified if the principal shall pay the Owner the difference between the amount specified in said bid and the amount for which the Owner may procure the required work or supplies, or both, if the latter amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void, and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

*NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED IN DUPLICATE WITH THE BID AND MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A VALID POWER OF ATTORNEY.

B5-2 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-12 BID BOND_draft.doc

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bonded parties have executed this instrument under

their several seals this day of , , the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. In the Presence of:

______________________________________ (Contractor)

WITNESS: ______________________________ (SEAL)

Signature of Principal/Corporate Officer

(SEAL) Title

_______________________________________ Surety

By:___________________________________

_______________________________________

Bond No.

NOTE: THIS FORM TO BE SUBMITTED BY APPARENT LOW BIDDER WITHIN TEN DAYS OF REQUEST BY THE COUNTY

B6-1 Revised 10/24/13 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-13 EXPERIENCE EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY



EXPERIENCE AND EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION I. General

a. Legal Title, Address and Phone Number of Organization

____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

b. Maryland Representative's Name, Title and Address. ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

c. (Check one) Corporation Co-Partnership Individual ______ II. Experience

a. Indicate type of contracting undertaken by your organization and years experience.

General Sub Type _ Years Years Years

Type Years

Type Years



b. State construction experience of principal members of your organization. Construction Experience

NAME

TITLE (As Pres., Mgr, etc.)

CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE

YEARS

TYPE OF WORK (Sewer, Hwy, Bridges,

Paving, etc.)

IN WHAT CAPACITY (Supt, Foreman)

c. Give any special qualifications of firm members (Registered Engineer, Surveyors, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

d. List Principal projects completed by your organization.

Description

Gen. or Sub (If sub, what type of work)

Your Contract

Amount

Year

Reference

e. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? ____________________

If so, where and why? __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________



f. Has your firm been assessed liquidated damages within the last three years? If so, explain circumstances. (Attach separate sheet)

III. Financial Capability

The following financial data shall be provided upon request of the County. If the Bidder is a subsidiary of another firm, then the information requested should be provided for both the Bidder and the parent organization, as it may be applicable to the Bid. a. The Bidder's most recent Form 10-K, as filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange

Commission ("SEC") and all Form 100’s since the last 10-K, b. All Bidders not filing a Form 10K with the SEC should submit the following

information:

1. Federal Tax Returns for the last three (3) years;

2. Audited financial statements for the past three (3) fiscal years to include, at a minimum, income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in financial position;

3. Copies of quarterly financial reports since the last audited statement;

4. Any material changes in the mode of conducting business, bankruptcy

proceedings, and mergers or acquisitions for the past three years, as well as any disclosure of any potential mergers or acquisitions; and

5. Any and all lawsuits filed against the Bidder since January 1, 1988 and a

statement as to the outcome or current status of each such lawsuit.

d. A full and complete description of the legal and financial relationships among all entities which will be bound by the terms and conditions of the Contract including any entities which will guarantee the obligations of, or provide financial support to, any such parties.

IV. Bidder Certification



The above statements are certified to be true and accurate and we have the equipment, labor, supervision and financial capacity to perform this Contract, either with our organization, or with subcontractors.

Dated at this day of , .

By: _________________________________ _________________________________

(Title of Person Signing) _________________________________

(Name of Organization) State of _________________________________ County of _______________________________ Being duly sworn states that he/she

Name is of (Office) (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Sworn to before me this day of , . Notary Public

My Commission Expires


B7-1 Last Revised: 10/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs

(revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-14 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY

CFSU Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation

Proposal No.: C537861 Project No.: C537800

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS

Subcontractor's Type of Work or Supplier's

Type of Equipment

Name

Address

Percent of

Total Contract

MBE SBE or

WBE

1 of 2 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-15 APPENDIX A_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY


APPENDIX "A" CONTRACTOR CUSTOMER SERVICE PROGRAM

Customer Relations Requirements All consultants, contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and etc., are required to assume their part in the County's Customer Oriented Programs. A description of the Department's policy and its action items are as follows: "The Department of Public Works has a customer oriented philosophy that requires all employees, consultants, contractors, etc., to adhere to the five dimensions of quality service." The Five Dimensions of Quality Service Are: 1. Reliability: Is what was promised provided dependably and accurately?

a. Scheduling b. Proper notification c. Traffic control d. Sediment control e. Quality of work

2. Assurance: Are the employees knowledgeable and courteous, and can they express trust and

confidence?

a. Citizen interaction - knowledgeable b. Concerns remedied

3. Empathy: Are caring and individual attention provided?

a. Citizen interaction - polite, courteous b. Callbacks will be treated as part of the construction effort

4. Responsiveness: Is there a willingness to help customers and provide proper service?

a. Response to citizen concern within two days. If required work is anticipated to exceed

2 of 2 Revised 3/08 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-15 APPENDIX A_draft.doc

two days, a schedule must be provided indicating when work will be completed. b. Additionally, follow-up must be accomplished. Whether the work is complete or not,

the follow-up must be done.

5. Tangibles: Are the physical facilities and equipment customer friendly?

a. Traffic control b. Sediment control c. Safe driving - includes control of speed of vehicles d. Sanitary facilities provided for manpower

As a means of ensuring the contractor's participation, each contractor must provide a customer plan and a team composition responsible for adhering to the "Five Dimensions of Customer Service" given previously. Additionally, the plan and the team composition are to be submitted within fourteen (14) calendar days of NTP or concurrent with the contractor's on-site mobilization. The team leader is required to oversee the entire program and be available to assist in resolution of concerns. The other members of the team will provide courteous and prompt assistance to concerns. Any contractor's employee(s) not performing in accordance with the above will be subject to removal from further participation in the project upon written order from the County representative. Failure to participate or respond as required shall be cause for termination of the contract for non-performance.

1 of 3 Revised 1/18/12 K:\60654 AACDPW\Deliverable\Final\AACDPW - Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation - Final Submission - 031516\Front end specs (revised) from Judy on 042716\C537861_46-16 APPENDIX B_draft.doc

ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY


APPENDIX “B”

CONTRACTOR SECURITY PROGRAM

This appendix describes measures to be taken by the contractor to reduce the risk of vulnerability to Anne Arundel County Department of Public Works (DPW) Utility Operations facilities for each of the Homeland Security Threat Advisory Levels. Utility Operations personnel may take measures based on the Department of Public Works Policy and Procedures Manual that will impact the contractor’s work. Consultants, contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, etc. are required to perform their part in this program.

The following measures shall be implemented based on the security threat level declared by Utility Operations.

Standard Practice & Measures

1 Carry identification while on Utility Operations property. Minimum identification may consist of a printed or hand written business card or paper bearing the hiring company’s name, the individual’s name and the signature of the hiring company foreman, supervisor or other representative.

2 Challenge unknown visitors. Request identification and purpose of visit.

3 Review security procedures with personnel.

4 Report suspicious activity (carrying suitcases / containers, photographing, noting or asking questions about operations, pumping or pipeline operations or security measures) to supervision. Supervision determines whether to contact law enforcement and chain of command.

5 Report unidentified vehicles parked or operated in a suspicious manner on or in Utility Operations facilities, equipment or rights-of-way. Notify supervision of infractions. Supervision determines whether to contact law enforcement and chain of command.

Elevated Threat Advisory Level – No Specific Information on Timing or Location

1 Remind personnel to:

a. Carry identification while on Utility Operations property. Minimum identification may consist of a printed or hand written business card or paper bearing the hiring company’s name, the individual’s name and the signature of the hiring company foreman, supervisor or other representative.

b. Challenge unknown visitors.

c. Request identification and purpose of visit.

2 Cease public tours.


3 If directed by Utility Operations:

a. Remove vehicles and objects (e.g. dumpsters) parked within 25 yards of specified facilities.

b. Park vehicles outside facilities. Implement centralized parking and shuttle service.

c. Report suspicious vehicles or objects to Utility Operations supervision.

d. Verify the identity of individuals entering specified facilities.

e. Facility gates and entrances will be locked, except when passing through. Limit access to essential employees and contractors. Verify the identity of individuals entering facilities. Issue visitor badges to visitors.

f. Inspect buildings, rooms and storage areas not in regular use, daily.

g. Inspect the interior and exterior of buildings for suspicious activities or packages. Check for signs of tampering or indications of unauthorized entry.

4 Utility Operations may:

a. Erect barriers to control the direction of traffic flow and parking.

b. Consult with law enforcement to close public roads and facilities.

Imminent Threat Advisory Level – Threat at Location Impending or Very Soon

1 Remind personnel to:

a. Display identification while on Utility Operations property. Minimum identification may consist of a printed or hand written business card or paper bearing the hiring company’s name, the individual’s name and the signature of the hiring company foreman, supervisor or other representative.

b. Challenge unknown visitors.

c. Request identification of anyone not displaying it and ask the purpose of his or her visit.

2 Limit access to facilities and activities to personnel with legitimate and verifiable need to enter.

a. Cease Public Tours

3 Buildings, rooms, and storage areas will be locked. Inspect baggage, briefcases, and packages brought to the facility.

4 If directed by Utility Operations:

a. Remove vehicles and objects (e.g. dumpsters) parked within 25 yards of specified facilities. Identify owners of vehicles on Utility Operation property. Have unidentified vehicles inspected by law enforcement personnel and, if appropriate, removed.

b. Park vehicles outside facilities. Implement centralized parking and shuttle service.

c. Inspect delivery vehicles and containers entering the facility. Require advance delivery notification and validate credentials of the driver.


d. Implement daily inspections of specified buildings and grounds.

e. Take steps to control access to specified facilities.

f. Facility gates and entrances will be locked, except when passing through. Limit access to essential employees and contractors. Verify the identity of individuals entering facilities. Issue visitor badges to visitors.

g. Inspect buildings, rooms and storage areas not in regular use daily.

h. Inspect the interior and exterior of buildings for suspicious activities or packages. Check for signs of tampering or indications of unauthorized entry.

i. Implement mailroom procedures. Have mail and packages sent to a central, secure location and inspected before distribution.

5 Utility Operations may:

a. Restrict access to specific facilities.

b. Request closure of public roads and facilities in the vicinity of specified facilities.

c. Stop work in part or in total.

d. Erect barriers to control the direction of traffic flow and parking.

e. Consult with law enforcement to close public roads and facilities.

f. Post guards.

60654 / AACDPW 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENT

PART II

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 03 90 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01 04 10 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 04 50 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS 01 40 00 QUALITY CONTROL 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 DEMOLITION

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 61 00 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 22 16 METAL LIGHT COVE 09 30 00 TILING 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 67 00 ACRYLIC FLOORING 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING

60654 / AACDPW 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENT

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 SIGNAGE 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 22 33 00 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 31 00.00 HVAC DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 23 82 00.00 CONVECTION HEATING UNITS DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE, CABLE AND ACCESSORIES 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 28 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 63 ACCEPTANCE ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 50 00 LIGHTING

Arundel Center Toilet Rooms Renovation

60654 / AACDPW 01 10 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Contract Documents: Indicate the work of the Contract and related requirements and conditions that have an impact of the project. Related requirements and conditions that are indicated on the Contract Documents include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Applicable codes and regulations 2. Notices and Permits 3. Existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site. 4. Requirements for partial Owner occupancy during completion of the Contract Work.

B. Summary be References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, addenda and modifications to the Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this project manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. Work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomena including weather conditions and other forces outside the contract documents.

C. Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly and without force and effect upon the contract documents, the work of the Contract generally includes: 1. Arundel Center toilet rooms renovation that includes all the toilet rooms on the north and

south wing of the building. The work includes renovating the Men’s and Women’s Toilet Rooms on each floor of the north and south wings, changing the location of Jan’s closet and adding ADA compliant unisex restroom on each floor of the north wing. The work excludes toilet room in the engineer’s office on the basement floor.

D. Schedule of Values 1. For contracts of $50,000 or more, submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 within two

weeks of Notice to Proceed; Contractor’s standard form or media-driven printout will be considered on request.

2. Format; Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major Specification Sections.

3. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor overhead and profit. 4. Revise schedule to list change orders, for each application for payment.

E. Work Week, Hours of Work 1. All work , unless noted otherwise, shall be accomplished during the days and hours of work

as specified hereinafter;

Days of the Week: Monday through Friday Activity/Hours: Work in Offices: 7:30 AM - 4:30 PM Activity/Hours: Mechanical Rooms: 7:30 AM to 4:30 PM

Activity/Hours Work Outside Offices that does not interrupt customers and workers/6:00 AM to 6:00 PM

2. When the Contractor starts work according to the dates set forth at the Pre-Work

Conference, all work is to be accomplished in a continuous manner. The Contractor may arrange, if agreed to by the Owner, to gain access to the building at times other than those specified. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least 48 hours prior to performing work at times other than specified to arrange for access to the building.

1.02 SITE LOCATION

A. The work under this Contract is located at: 1. Arundel Center, 44 Calvert Street Annapolis, MD 21401



1.03 COORDINATION AND INTERFERENCES

A. Installation and Setting Drawings: The Engineer's Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work and as such cannot show actual construction conditions. Perform modifications in the work to compensate for minor interferences and structural obstructions as part of the Work and at no increase in Contract Price. 1. Prepare completely dimensioned installation or setting drawings of the various Trades'

equipment and work requiring openings or other provisions to be made in the structure construction. Such drawings shall have the Engineer's approval prior to their use.

B. Material Handling and Storage Interferences: Do not unload or store material where it will interfere with the progress of the Project to cause delays, or prevent Fire Employees from performing their normal duties at the site.

C. Existing Facilities: The site of the work is a public office building and has public customers. 1. The work of this Contract shall not impede the daily operations of the facility. The

Contractor shall arrange his operations so as not to interfere with normal activities. a. Perform the mechanical and electrical work of this Project in such sequence that

interruptions of service will be of the shortest duration possible.

1.04 CONTRACTOR AND BUILDING OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Prior to the start of a work session, the contractor shall move furniture as required to perform work. Furniture shall be returned to its original location at the end of the work session.

B. The contractor shall cover and protect all equipment, furniture, floor and wall finishes which are not part of the scope of work during each work session.

1.05 PHASING OF WORK

Phasing is recommended to be accomplished based on the alphabetical order below.

A. Phase I: The ground floor toilet rooms; Men’s, Women’s and Unisex on the north wing shall be completed and operational prior to beginning of any work that needs to be performed on other toilet rooms.

B. Phase II: The toilet rooms on the first, second, third and fourth floors of the north wing shall be completed at once working during the day but with system off hour shut downs only.

C. Phase IIA: The Executive Toilet Room shall be completed with working office off hours and limited to 10 days duration. The work schedule shall be coordinated with the owner.

D. Phase III: The toilet rooms on the south wing shall be completed at once after the work is completed and all toilet rooms are operational on the north wing.

1.06 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. This contract will be constructed under a single prime contract.

B. Existing Condition are reflected correctly to the best of the Owner’s knowledge. Should minor conditions be encountered which are not exactly as indicated, modification to accommodate new Work shall be made as required at no additional expense to Owner. Verify existing conditions and notify Owner and Designer should the conditions vary from those described in the Contract Documents.

C. Allowance No.1; Provide an allowance of $10,000 for the cost of any asbestos testing and/or asbestos removal (other than that already identified in the contract documents) needed during the construction. Provision has been made on the revised Proposal Form to identify this allowance. In the event that the cost of items covered in the allowance excess the allowance amount, the County will write a Change Order for the excess Cost. In the event that the cost is less than the allowance, the County will take a Credit Change Order for the Savings.

D. Allowance No.2; Provide an allowance of $7,000 for the cost of the building permit. The architect, Gannett Fleming, Inc has applied for the building permit (BLD16-0170) and paid the initial fee. The contractor will be responsible for picking up the permit and paying the balance due utilizing the Building Permit Allowance. In the event the cost of the building permit exceeds the allowance amount, the County will write a Change Order for the excess cost. In the event



that the cost is less than the allowance, the County will take a Credit Change order for the Savings.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 03 90 - 1 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

SECTION 01 03 90

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: General provisions for coordination and preconstruction conference progress meetings that apply to this Contract.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 04 10: Project Coordination.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work, which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

E. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners partial occupancy.

F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The preconstruction meeting will be scheduled and facilitated by Anne Arundel County’s CM/I after notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submissions of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress

schedule. 3. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract. 4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 5. Scheduling.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings will be facilitated by Anne Arundel County’s CM/I

B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. Architect/Engineer will record and distribute copies of meeting minutes within 3 days.

C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems, which impede planned progress.


60654 / AACDPW 01 03 90 - 2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 04 10 - 1 PROJECT COORDINATION

SECTION 01 04 10

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: General provisions for the project coordination administrator, construction mobilization, schedules, submittals, coordination drawings, and closeout procedures that apply to work in this Section.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work. 2. Section 01 03 90: Coordination and Meetings.

1.02 PROJECT COORDINATION ADMINISTRATOR

A. The project coordination administrator for this project shall be the project manager appointed by the Owner.

1.03 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION

A. Cooperate with the Administrator in allocation of mobilization areas and staging areas; for access, traffic, and parking facilities.

B. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Manager.

C. Comply with Project Manager’s procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

D. Comply with instructions of the Administrator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.

E. Coordinate filed engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Manager.

1.04 SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary progress schedule in accordance with Section 01 30 00 coordinated with Project construction schedule.

B. After review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with revised Project schedule.

C. During progress of Work, revise and resubmit with Applications for Payment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00 for review and compliance with Contract Documents, for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to work of separate contracts. Revise and resubmit as required.

B. Submit applications for payment on AIA G702 forms for review, and for transmittal to Architect/Engineer.

C. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Project Manager.

D. Process requests for substitutions, and change orders, through Project Manager.

E. Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspection reports, for transmittal to Architect/Engineer.

1.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Provide information required by Project Manager for preparation of coordination drawings.

B. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect/Engineer.


60654 / AACDPW 01 04 10 - 2 PROJECT COORDINATION

1.07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Notify Project Manager when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Accompany Project Manager and/or Architect/Engineer on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with Project Manager’s instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and for access to Owner occupied areas.

C. Notify Project Manager when Work is considered finally complete. Accompany Administrator and/or Architect/Engineer on preliminary final inspection.

D. Comply with Project Manager instructions for completion of items of Work determined by the Architect/Engineer's final inspection.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 04 50 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 01 04 50

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: As work of this Section, perform all necessary cutting, fitting and patching as required to complete the Work to accomplish the following: 1. To make the various materials and equipment fit together properly. 2. To uncover and restore portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. To remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. To remove samples of installed work as may be specified for testing. 5. To provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of the materials

and equipment of other Specifications Sections. 6. To remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02 41 00: Demolition

C. Penetrations: Defined as openings made for system components (pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.) passing through structure construction.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Written Description: Provide a written description for all cutting and patching work, the methods to be employed and the Products proposed for patching. The written description shall include accurate locations in the Project for all proposed cutting and patching.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Advance Notification: Where cutting and patching will be required in existing structures, notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance to comply with the following paragraph.

B. Consult with the Engineer concerning proposed methods of cutting and patching to be employed. Refer to the Part 3.01 EXAMINATION of this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Patching materials shall comply with the applicable product specifications as specified in this Project Manual. Where a particular product is required and not specified in this Project Manual, provide patching products to match existing materials where cutting and patching will be performed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Concealed Conditions: Where the exact conditions of concealed areas are unknown, make pilot drillings or small test cuttings to determine the unknown conditions.

B. Unknown Existing Conditions: To prevent over-cuts and drill-puncture through existing material surfaces not scheduled to be cut or drilled, comply with the following: 1. Where unknown conditions exist, make pilot drillings or small test cuttings in an effort to

determine the nature of unknown existing conditions. 2. Attempt to determine locations of embedded mechanical or electrical items (if any) through

the use of appropriate detection equipment. 3. Should differing conditions be encountered in cutting and drilling operations, such as

concealed structural elements and embedded mechanical and electrical items, discontinue such operations and report the encountered conditions to the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Protection:


60654 / AACDPW 01 04 50 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. In-Place Protection: In each area of cutting and patching work, provide in-place temporary protection over existing surfaces to prevent damage and weathering deterioration to such surfaces.

2. Use methods of support and attachment of such temporary protective materials which do not cause damage or defacement of any nature to existing surfaces being protected.

B. Temporary Supports: When required, provide adequate temporary support to assure the structural integrity of the affected portion of the Work being cut.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Perform cutting work by such methods which will prevent extensive damage to surrounding work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive patching work materials.

B. Completed patched work shall match surrounding work in material composition, finish, plane and appearance including the appropriate surface decoration (painting, staining, wall-covering, etc.).

C. Perform surface decoration refinishing for continuous surfaces to the nearest intersections. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.

D. Cutting and Patching Option In Masonry and Concrete (Circular Penetrations): Contractor shall have the option to perform cutting and patching work in masonry for circular Penetrations by the following methods.

E. Masonry Unit Removal Method: Cut-out and remove existing whole masonry units as required to accommodate the setting of sleeves and Penetrations through masonry. 1. Following setting of sleeves and the make-up of Penetrations, replace cut-out masonry

units with part units made by cutting existing removed units with a masonry saw. Set such part units in mortar matching existing in composition and color. Slush mortar solidly around sleeves and Penetrations allowing a sealant recess on both sides of masonry. Patched masonry work shall match existing in appearance and plane.

2. Following above stated masonry cutting and patching work repaint those masonry surfaces as they were originally painted. Allow new mortar to reach full cure before repainting.

3. The extent of repainting work is limited to the existing entire wall area (floor to ceiling and to adjoining or intersecting walls), in which Penetrations occur, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

4. Painting work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900.

F. Core-Drilling Method: Core-drill openings as required to accommodate the setting of sleeves and Penetrations through existing masonry. Make such core-drilled openings true, clean and free from spalling of existing masonry materials. 1. Following setting of sleeves and make-up of Penetrations in core-drilled openings install

sealant, as specified in Section 07900, on both sides of masonry. 2. Repainting work will not be required with core-drilling method, provided the core-drilled

penetration is made true and clean and free from spalling. However, clean wall areas around core-drilled Penetrations to such conditions at least equal to same area conditions prior to core-drilling method.

G. Removal Work: Perform removal work as noted and indicated on the Drawings. 1. After removal work is performed, patch anchor holes in the existing structure (as required).

Patching materials shall comply with original structure materials for each surface being patched.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 30 00 - 1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 30 00

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: This Section includes requirements for submissions to be made by the Contractor for materials and equipment to be used in the Project. The descriptions under the articles in each specification Section indicates a description of submittals required.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 40 00: Quality Control

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: The term shop drawing used throughout this Section and the Contract Documents includes manufacturer's product data, shop drawings, samples and certificates. 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature, product specifications, performance

and capacity rating schedules, published details, and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Contractor or manufacturer prepared, completely dimensioned and

annotated detail drawings of the products presented. a. Shop drawings shall include locations of services connections, internal and external

power and control wiring diagrams, systems connections, anchor bolt layout and details of materials and construction.

b. Shop drawings shall include mechanical information such as diameter of shafting, rated horsepower of motors, gear and bearing ratings, service factors and weights of principal parts as well as the completely assembled equipment.

c. Shop drawings shall include elevation views of control panels identifying face-mounted and internally-mounted components.

d. Where specified, shop drawings shall include process and instrumentation diagrams employing Instrument Society of America symbols and nomenclature to identify control system function and components.

e. Shop drawings shall also include Contractor prepared layout and setting drawings as necessary to illustrate the assembly of various elements of the Work.

3. Samples: Contractor or manufacturer prepared and delivered physical samples as requested in the various Specifications Sections.

4. Certificates: Contractor or manufacturer prepared written instruments certifying product compliance with the Project Manual and Drawings.

B. Photocopies: Provide photocopied information of high resolution and letter quality. Provide submittal sheets of 8 1/2 x 11 inches, or if larger, and folded to 8 1/2 x 11 inches so that the title block is clearly visible without unfolding. 1. Provide drawings similarly folded and inserted in pockets as appropriate. 2. Bind each set of copies in a hard cover, loose-leaf, 3-ring or 19-ring binder which allows a

minimum of 1/2-inch ring space when closed to facilitate binder opening to access and remove any sheet as necessary.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents



E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer and Project Manager at business address.] Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.

H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal.

I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after Notice to Proceed for Architect/Engineer review.

B. Revise and resubmit as required.

C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version.

D. Submit a computer-generated chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first workday of each week.

E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.

G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.

1.05 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which Architect/Engineer will retain.

B. After review distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and for Record Documents described in Section 01 70 00 - Contract Closeout.

1.07 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which the Architect/Engineer will retain.

B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01 70 00 - Contract Closeout.

1.08 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection.

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.



D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; Architect/Engineer will retain one of which.

E. Reviewed samples, which may be used in the Work, are indicated in individual specification Sections

1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.

1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.11 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION MANUALS

A. Manual Contents: Provide the separate manuals for each system as required in the Specifications. Each manual shall include under separate section headings, as applicable, the following information for each item of equipment: 1. Model/Serial Numbers: Provide model and serial number of all equipment furnished. 2. Approved Shop Drawings: One copy of each shop drawing including wiring diagrams,

corrected and approved as installed, along with Contractor's coordination and layout drawing.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Full set of wiring diagrams for each system (in addition to equipment wiring diagrams).

4. Catalog Information: Catalog cuts showing applicable information. 5. System Description: Brief description of each system and its components as may be

required for the system provided. 6. Installation, Erection and Start-Up: Installation information showing minimum acceptable

requirements for: a. Erection or installation instructions. b. System start-up procedures.

7. Operation and Maintenance Requirements: Include adequate illustrative material to identify and locate operating controls, indicating devices and locations of areas or items requiring maintenance. a. Describe, in detail, starting and stopping procedures for components, adjustments

required to obtain optimum equipment performance, and corrective actions for malfunctions.

b. Maintenance instructions describing the nature and frequency of routine maintenance and procedures to be followed. Indicate any special tools, materials, and test equipment that may be required. Include manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions, as applicable.

8. Repair Information: Include diagrams and schematics, guidance for diagnosing problems, and detailed instructions for making repairs. Provide troubleshooting information that includes a statement of the indication or symptoms of trouble and the sequential instructions necessary. Include test hook-ups to determine the cause, special tools and test equipment, and methods for returning the equipment to operating conditions. Information may be in chart form or in tabular format with appropriate headings.

9. Parts Breakdown: Provide complete parts breakdown for rooftop air conditioners. 10. Spare Parts: Provide a schedule of recommended spare parts to be stocked, complete

with part number, inventory quantity and ordering information.



a. Provide names and addresses of nearest parts and service supply agencies. 11. Contact Information: Provide the names and addresses of local manufacturers'

representative.

B. Manual Submittal: Submit five copies of each O & M manual required in the Specifications. Submit manuals after the project is 75 percent complete and at least 60 days prior to Contract completion or scheduled equipment start-up/testing. 1. Note: If the 75 percent and 60 days criteria conflict, then manuals shall be submitted at

least 45 days before Contract completion.

C. Manual Format: Arrange the manual content in binders as follows: 1. Hard Cover Binders: Submit manuals bound under hard cover. The following identification

shall appear on the cover: The words EQUIPMENT OPERATING, MAINTENANCE, AND INSTALLATION MANUAL (O & M); the name, building number, location and indication of utility or systems covered. Manuals shall be approximately 8 1/2 inches x 11 inches with large sheets folded in and capable of being easily pulled out for reference.

2. Warning Page: Provide the appropriate warning pages to warn of potential dangers (if they exist), such as high voltage, flammable liquid, carcinogens, high pressures, etc. Place warning pages inside the front cover, in front of the title page.

3. Title Page: The title page shall show the name of the firm (designer or contractor) preparing the manual and the date of publication.

4. Table of Contents: Provide a table of contents that lists the separate section headings and their appropriate page number.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 40 00 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provisions for quality assurance and control of installation, references, and field samples as they apply to the specification sections of this Contract

B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 30 00: Submittals

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents.

B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents.

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.04 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review.

B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.

C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 50 00 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: This Section includes the provision of certain temporary facilities and controls

(as specified throughout this Section) at the site or sites of the Work until the project is complete, and the Project facilities are placed in successful operation by Anne Arundel County. Include in the Bid all costs associated with providing necessary temporary facilities and controls, as well as fees and all other expenses charged by serving utility companies.

1.02 TEMPORARY SERVICES AND FACILITIES A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing temporary

facilities and controls, and removal and restoration of affected areas when the temporary facilities and controls are no longer needed or required.

B. Temporary Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning In Existing Structures: The existing heating, ventilation and air conditioning facilities within the building may be used during the construction period.

C. Temporary Electrical Power In Existing Structures: Temporary electrical power required for performance of the Work may be obtained from existing 120 volt outlets within the building. Provide temporary electrical power as required for other than 120 volt service. Provide temporary electrical power extensions (cords, wires, etc.) and task lighting as necessary for the performance of the Work.

1.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS AND PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection for Existing Finishes, Furniture and Equipment: The existing floor and

wall finishes, furniture and equipment in the building shall be protected from damage resulting from work of this contract. When performing work in the toilet rooms, the Contractor shall provide in-place protective coverings which will protect the finishes, equipment and furniture along the work path

1.04 FIELD OFFICES, STORAGE AND PARKING A. The contractor’s staging area: Boiler room. B. The contractor can use the loading dock area for debris to be removed on a daily basis. The dumpster must be unloaded at the raised height and shall be coordinated with the owner.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 60 00 - 1 Products & Substitutions

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1. SUMMARY

a. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the project.

b. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section "Submittals".

c. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified.

d. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions".

e. Anne Arundel County Public Schools will not accept any products that contain any asbestos containing materials. Carefully follow the related information and forms for materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. Definitions: Definitions used in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents, including such terms as, "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction" and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

B. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless of whether they were specifically purchased for the project or taken from the Contractor's previously purchased stock. The term "product" as used herein includes the terms "material", "equipment", "system" and other terms of similar intent.

C. "Named Products" are products identified by use of the manufacturer's name for a product, including such items as a make or model designation, as recorded in manufacturer's published product literature, of the latest issue as of the date of the contract documents.

D. "Materials" are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form units of work.

E. "Equipment" is defined as a product with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and in particular, a product that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Required Submittals: Submittal requirements are found in each specification section. Prepare a schedule in tabular form showing each product listed. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.

B. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.

C. Coordinate the product list schedule with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals.

D. Form: Prepare the product-listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings:

1. Related Specification Section number.

2. Generic name used in Contract documents.



3. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations.

4. Manufacturer's name and address.

5. Supplier's name and address.

6. Installer's name and address.

E. Owner's Representative's Action: The Owner's Representative will respond in writing to the Contractor within two (2) weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a wavier of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative's response will include the following:

1. A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation for this action.

IDENTIFICATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL

The U.S Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires the contractor to identify asbestos-containing material under the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA), 15 U.S.C. §§ 2641-2656, and EPA’s implementation codified at 40 C.F.R. Part 763, Subpart E.

Contractor/Supplier shall supply documentation that the material(s) contain no asbestos containing materials. The documentation shall be provided for the bulk samples, which shall be analyzed in accordance with AHERA regulations.

Contractor/Supplier shall utilize an independent laboratory for analytical purposes. The laboratory shall have received EPA accreditation for PLM/DS bulk sampling analysis, NVLAP accreditation and the bulk analyst shall have passed the McCrone Institute Bulk Analysis Course (or equivalent).

Contractor/Supplier shall also provide two (2) copies of an overview of the laboratories site, structure, controls, references and copy of their current NVLAP certificate.

Materials ordered that are produced in lots shall have the required EPA documentation for each lot produced. The sampling analysis for each lot shall be submitted at time of delivery to AACPS, if analysis is not provided AACPS shall not accept delivery of materials.

Contractor/Supplier shall submit the attached Verification of no (ACBM) in products-construction materials form with delivery of material(s).

A form that must be used for documentation (along with the laboratory information and test results) is attached to the end of this section.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind, from a single source, for each unit of work.

B. When it is discovered that specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce an adequate quantity to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Owner’s Representative for a determination of what product qualities are most important before proceeding. The Owner's Representative will designate those qualities, such as visual, structural, durability, or compatibility that are most important. When the Owner's Representative determination has been made, select products from those sources that produce products that possess the most important qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

C. Compatibility of Options: Compatibility of products is a basic requirement of product selection. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the project, the product selected must be compatible with other products previously selected, even if the products previously selected were also Contractor options. The complete compatibility between the various choices available to the Contractor is not assured by the various requirements of the Contract documents, but must be provided by the Contractor.



1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. General: Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft.

B. Control to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

C. In particular coordinate delivery and installation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.

1.06 SUBMITTALS - SUBSTITUTION:

A. Substitution Request Submittal:

1. Requests for Substitutions: Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution. In each request identify the product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced by the substitution; include related specification section and drawing numbers, and complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions. Include the following information, as appropriate, with each request.

B. Provide complete product data, drawings and descriptions of products, and fabrication and installation procedures.

C. Provide samples where applicable or requested.

D. Provide a detailed comparison of the significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work originally specified. Significant qualities include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect where applicable.

E. Provide complete coordination information. Include all changes required in other elements of the work to accommodate the substitution, including work performed by the Owner and separate Contractors.

F. Provide a statement indicating the effect the substitution will have on the work schedule in comparison to the schedule without approval of the proposed substitution. Include information regarding the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Time.

G. Provide complete cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

H. Provide certification by the Contractor to the effect that, in the Contractor's opinion, after thorough evaluation, the proposed substitution will result in work that in every significant respect is equal-to or better than the work required by the Contract documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated.

I. Include in this certification, the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, which may subsequently be necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

1. IDENTIFICATION OF ASBESTOS‐CONTAINING MATERIAL

The U.S Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires the contractor to identify asbestos-containing material under the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA), 15 U.S.C. §§ 2641-2656, and EPA’s implementation codified at 40 C.F.R. Part 763, Subpart E.

Contractor/Supplier shall supply documentation that the material(s) contain no asbestos containing materials. The documentation shall be provided for the bulk samples, which shall be analyzed in accordance with AHERA regulations.

Contractor/Supplier shall utilize an independent laboratory for analytical purposes. The laboratory shall have received EPA accreditation for PLM/DS bulk sampling analysis, NVLAP accreditation and the bulk analyst shall have passed the McCrone Institute Bulk Analysis Course (or equivalent).



Contractor/Supplier shall also provide two (2) copies of an overview of the laboratories site, structure, controls, references and copy of their current NVLAP certificate.

Materials ordered that are produced in lots shall have the required EPA documentation for each lot produced. The sampling analysis for each lot shall be submitted at time of delivery to AACPS, if analysis is not provided AACPS shall not accept delivery of materials.

Contractor/Supplier shall submit the attached Verification of no (ACBM) in products-construction materials form with delivery of material(s).

A form that must be used for documentation (along with the laboratory information and test results) is attached to the end of this section.

Change Order Form: Submit requests for substitutions in the form and in accordance with procedures required for change order proposals.

Owner's Representative Action: Within one week of receipt of the Contractor's request for substitution, the Owner's Representative will request additional information or documentation as may be needed for evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or within one week of receipt of the requested additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Owner's Representative will notify the Contractor of either the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.

1.07 PROCEDURES:

A. Substitutions: The Contractor's requests for changes in the products, materials, equipment and methods of construction required by the contract documents are considered requests for "substitutions", and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are not considered as substitutions:

B. Revisions to the contract documents, where requested by the Owner, or Owner's Representative are considered as "changes" not substitutions.

C. No substitutions will be accepted during the bidding process.

D. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to the Contract Date, are included in the contract documents and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified.

E. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in the contract documents are choices available to the Contractor and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified.

F. Except as otherwise provided in the contract documents, the Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do not constitute "substitutions" and do not constitute a basis for change orders.

1.08 STANDARDS

A. Refer to division‐1 section "definitions and standards" for the applicability of industry standards to the products specified for the project, and for the acronyms used in the text of the specification sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE:

A. General: Requirements for individual products are indicated in the contract documents; compliance with these requirements is in itself a contract requirement. These requirements may be specified in any one of several different specifying methods, or in any combination of these methods. These methods include the following:

1. Proprietary.

2. Descriptive.

3. Performance.



4. Compliance with Reference Standards.

B. Compliance with codes, compliance with graphic details, allowances, and similar provisions of the contract documents also have a bearing on the selection process.

C. Procedures for Selecting Products: The Contractor's options in selecting products are limited by requirements of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include but are not limited to the following for the various indicated methods of specifying:

D. Non Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where the specifications name products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to the use of these products only, the Contractor may, at his option, use any available product that complies with contract requirements.

E. Or Equal: Where some particular product or device is specified by brand name or manufacturer it is to be considered a standard. If approved equal, items of other manufacturer than those mentioned may be used, unless specifically noted otherwise for purposed of standardization. Any substitution must receive the written approval of the Owner's Representative. In the specifications, many times are preceded or followed by the phrase "or approved equal" and many others are not. The absence of that phrase is not to be interpreted as in derogation of the provisions of the paragraph. Comply with those contract document provisions concerning "substitutions" for obtaining Owner's Representative's approval.

F. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where the specifications describe a product or assembly generically, in detail, listing the exact characteristics required, but without use of a brand or trade name, provide products or assemblies that provide the characteristics indicated and otherwise comply with contract requirements.

G. Performance Specification Requirements: Where the specifications require compliance with indicated performance requirements, provide products that comply with the specific performance requirements indicated, and that are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

1. The manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's individual certification of performance. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for specific performances.

2. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where the specifications require only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of selecting a product that complies with specification requirements, including standards, codes, and regulations.

H. Visual Matching: Where matching an established sample or existing is required, the final judgment of whether a product proposed by the Contractor matches the sample satisfactorily will be determined by the Owner's Representative. Where there is no product available within the specified product category that matches the sample satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with the provisions of the contract documents concerning "substitutions" and "change orders" for the selection of a matching product in another product category, or for non-compliance with specified requirements.

I. Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or similar phrases, the Contractor has the option of selecting the product and manufacturer, provided the selection complies with other specified requirements. The Owner's Representative is subsequently responsible for selecting the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected by the Contractor.

J. Allowances: Refer to individual sections of the specifications and "Allowances" provisions in Division-1 sections for an indication of product selections that are controlled by established allowances, and for the procedures required for processing such selections.



2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Conditions: The Contractor's request for a substitution will be received and considered when extensive revisions to the contract documents are not required, when the proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the contract documents, when the requests are timely, fully documented and properly submitted, and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by the Owner's Representative. Otherwise, the requests will be returned without action except to record non-compliance with these requirements.

B. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution where the request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the contract documents.

C. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However, the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly.

D. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

E. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for a substitution where a substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting of offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as additional compensation to the Owner's Representative for redesign and evaluation services, the increased cost of other work by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.

F. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner, which is compatible with other materials of the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

G. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated.

H. The Owner's Representative will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot receive a warranty as required by the contract documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution includes the required warranty.

I. Work-Related Submittals: The Contractor's submittal of and the Owner's Representative's acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of the contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof.

2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Provide products that comply with the requirements of the contract documents that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, and finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

B. Standard Products: Where they are available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

C. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, the Owner is likely to need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard, domestically produced products for which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and its parts are likely to be available to the Owner at a later date.

D. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on



exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on the exterior of the completed project.

E. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the products in the applications indicated.

B. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of acceptance.

VERIFICATION OF NO ASBESTOS IN PRODUCTS – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

♦ PRODUCT: _______________________________________________________

♦ MANUFACTURER: _________________________________________________

♦ SUPPLIER: _______________________________________________________

♦ LOT/PRODUCTION #: ______________________________________________

I/We, the undersigned certify that the product(s) listed above contains no Asbestos.

Provide documentation that the material(s) contain no asbestos. The documentation must be provided for the bulk samples, which were analyzed in accordance with AHERA regulations.

The supplier must utilize an independent laboratory for analytical purposes; provide an overview of the laboratories site, structure, controls, references and a copy of their current NVLAP certificate.

Analyze bulk samples of suspected asbestos-containing materials not previously sampled and\or for confirmatory purposes.

The laboratory must have received EPA accreditation for PLM/DS bulk sampling analysis, NVLAP accreditation and the bulk analyst must have passed the McCrone Institute Bulk Analysis Course (or equivalent).

The following is a partial list of products of concern. This list is not intended to be a complete list of all building products and materials.

Ceiling Tiles

Floor Tiles

Spray Applied Insulation

Fire board (transite type material)

Mastics

Roofing Materials & Tar

Pipe Insulation

Pipe Fitting Insulation

Folding Doors

Caulking

Duct Insulation

Boiler Insulation

Sheetrock (Drywall)

Spackle

Plaster

Adhesives

Glazing

Toilet Partitions

Fire Doors



___________________________________

Name

___________________________________

Company

___________________________________

Project

___________________________________

Date

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 01 70 00 - 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01 70 00

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Substantial completion. 3. Final acceptance. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Adjusting. 6. Project record documents. 7. Warranties. 8. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

B. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

C. Related Sections: 1. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 2. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Professional's review.

B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities.

C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion (for either entire Work or portions thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request: 1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either

100% completion for portion of Work claimed as “substantially complete,” or list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete.

2. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner’s full and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities.

a. The Owner will obtain the Use and Occupancy Permit from Anne Arundel County, if necessary.

b. Contractor shall arrange for inspections by County, State, and Owner’s Insurance Company.

5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to the

Contract Manager. 7. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner’s operating/maintenance

personnel. Discontinue (or change-over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements.



8. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces and restoration of marred exposed finishes.

9. Have fully operating HVAC system with air, and/or water balance testing and noise level testing complete and deficiencies corrected.

10. Have electrical and mechanical systems fully operating, inspected and accepted by authorities having jurisdiction.

11. All labeling shall be complete as required in the specifications. 12. All safety devices shall be fully operational. 13. All pressure vessels must be inspected and approved by appropriate State and local

authorities.

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon submission by the Contractor of the list of items to be completed or corrected, the Engineer will either inspect the Work and prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate, and repeat inspection when requested and only when assured that all work has been substantially completed. Results of inspection will for “Punch List” for final acceptance. 1. Repeat inspections will not take place earlier than seven days after prior inspections. 2. The Contractor shall accompany the Engineer at all times during the inspection.

1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting final inspection for a Certification of Final Acceptance and Final Payment, as required by the General Conditions, complete the following and time-known exceptions (if any) in request. 1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not

previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit copy of Engineer’s Punch List of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Contractor.

3. Submit consent of surety on AIA Document G707 “Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment.”

4. Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner. 5. Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with

insurance requirements. 6. Submit originals of permits obtained by the Contractor and four (4) copies of guarantees,

warranties, bonds, and certificates to the Owner. 7. Certify that to Contractor’s knowledge no products containing harmful amounts of

asbestos have been installed in any portion of the project.

B. Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor’s certification that all punch list work has been completed, including items from earlier inspections and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, the Engineer will reinspect the work. 1. Upon reinspection, Engineer will either advise the Contractor and Owner that all punch list

items have or have not been completed, Contractor shall have them completed and so certify to the Engineer. If necessary, the final inspection procedure shall be repeated.

1.05 FINAL CLEANING (BY LEAD CONTRACTOR/BY WORK AREA)

A. Execute cleaning of each work area prior to final area assessment.

B. The term work area shall be defined as the rooms or spaces scheduled for construction work.

C. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

E. Replace filters of operating equipment.



F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. Dispose of such materials off the site in a lawful manner at no additional expense to the Department.

G. Evenly spread and leave in neat, smooth condition excavated material disposed of lawfully on public property.

H. Furnish and place topsoil, fertilize and seed grassed areas affected by construction. Reseed and fertilize areas that fail to show a uniform stand of grass. Water, mow, rake, weed and otherwise maintain grass until final acceptance of Contract.

I. Restore the areas to the original conditions. Bring area up to original grade, replace walks, driveways, fences and other improvements, damaged or removed.

J. In case the Contractor shall fail or neglect to do so or to make satisfactory progress in doing so, within twenty-four (24) hours after the receipt of a written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove such surplus material and clear the roadways, sidewalks and other places, and the expense for such work will be charged to the Contractor and deducted from any moneys due or to become due him under the Contract.

1.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.07 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Bulletins. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by the Using Agency.

C. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

G. Submit documents to the Professional with claim for final Application for Payment.

1.08 WARRANTIES

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.

B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three (3)-D side ring binder with durable plastic cover.

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

E. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.



F. In the event of damage or failure of the work of this section within the Guarantee Period, immediately make repairs and replacements. Upon failure to perform maintenance or repairs within three (3) days after notice from the Department, the Using Agency may perform such maintenance or repairs and deduct the cost thereof from any moneys due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract.

G. Assume responsibility for any injury or damage resulting from lack of required maintenance or repairs during Guarantee Period. Indemnify and save harmless the Architects, Engineer and Owner from any and all loss by reason of any suit or action at law based upon any occurrence or omission during this period.

H. All equipment and accessories furnished under the Contracts shall be guaranteed by the Contractor and Manufacturer to be free from defects in design and materials of workmanship. The Contractor shall replace, without cost to the Department, any parts of the equipment which prove to be defective or which show undue wear within one year after the equipment has been placed in satisfactory operation and accepted in writing by the Department.

1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver to and place in location as directed by the Department; obtain receipt from the Department's Representative prior to final payment.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 02 41 00 - 1 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Procurement Documents, for submittal procedures.

B. Site Plan: Showing: 1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices.

C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and

construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS-- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SCOPE

A. Remove portions of existing building as indicated on the drawings.

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants. 5. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.

E. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.


60654 / AACDPW 02 41 00 - 2 DEMOLITION

1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection

point or point of reuse.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

B. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner.

C. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be

apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.

B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings and any items not shown specifically on drawings

required to be removed to accomplish new work.

C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new

services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.

D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 04 20 00 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Concrete Block.

B. Clay Facing Brick.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Flashings.

E. Lintels.

F. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS.

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.

C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

D. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating: Painting and coating surfaces.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.

C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.

D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

E. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2013a.

F. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a.

G. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.

H. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.

I. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014.

J. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.

K. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).

L. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2014.

M. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.

N. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories.



C. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the manufacture of concrete block.

F. Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water repellent admixture.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 – Product and Substitutions Requirements, for additional provisions.


A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar, accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up.

B. Locate where directed.

C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of

8 inches. 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block, as indicated. 3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.

a. Hollow block, as indicated. 4. Units with Integral Water Repellent Decorative Ground Face (CMU): Concrete block units

as specified in this section with polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of manufacture. a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:

1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514/E514M and for a minimum of 72 hours. (a) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours. (b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per

hour at the end of 24 hours. (c) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.

2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase. 3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease. 4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.

b. Use only in combination with mortar and grout that also has integral water repellent admixture.

c. Use water repellent admixtures for masonry units, mortar and grout by a single manufacturer.

2.02 BRICK UNITS

A. Manufacturers:



1. Belden Brick; Belcrest: www.beldenbrick.com. 2. Boral Bricks, Inc; _______: www.boralbricks.com. 3. Endicott Clay Products Co; _______: www.endicott.com. 4. General Shale Brick; _______: www.generalshale.com. 5. Substitutions: See section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units

can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 11.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Blok-Lok Limited; _______: www.blok-lok.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); _______: www.h-b.com. 3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 20 00; size as indicated on drawings; galvanized finish.

C. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.

E. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.

F. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

G. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face.

H. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in.

I. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup

through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage.

2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches.



2.05 FLASHINGS

A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 40 mil thick. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Blok-Lok Limited; _______: www.blok-lok.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); _______: www.h-b.com. c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid mesh designed for installation at flashing locations.

a. Manufacturers: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Break: www.advancedflashing.com. 2) Mortar Net Solutions; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier: www.mortarnet.com. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Building Paper: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt.

D. Cavity Vents: Polyester mesh. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Mortar Net Solutions; Mortar Net Weep Vents: www.mortarnet.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.07 LINTELS

A. At the Contractor's option, he may use precast CMU lintels in lieu o steel loose lintels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.

3.04 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running.



2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

D. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.05 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

E. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods.

F. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.

G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

H. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

I. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.

J. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated.

K. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.

L. Lay clay tile flue linings vertically, bedded in concrete block units. Extend above chimney cladding 8 inches . Trowel mortar smooth over chimney cladding and slope for positive drainage.

M. Place precast chimney cap atop chimney masonry; mortar into place; seal to protruding flue.

3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS

A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.

B. Install cavity vents in veneer and cavity walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels and near top of walls.

3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.

B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.

C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.

3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.



E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.

3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center.




3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER





E. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.

F. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center.

G. Seismic Reinforcement: Connect veneer anchors with continuous horizontal wire reinforcement before embedding anchors in mortar.

3.11 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRY


B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.



3.12 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

B. Extend plastic flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.

3.13 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.

B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. 1. Openings to 42 inches: Place two, No. 3 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 2. Openings from 42 inches to 78 inches: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from

bottom web. 3. Openings over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. 4. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch

of dimensioned position. 6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.



C. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.

3.14 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, No. 5 bars, 1 inch from bottom web.

B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.15 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.16 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.

3.17 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.

C. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.

D. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch.

E. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.18 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00.

3.20 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.21 PROTECTION

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 05 50 00 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.


A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.


A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.

B. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.

C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.

D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.

E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013.

F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

G. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013.

H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.

I. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.

J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

K. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2014.

L. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.

M. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012e1.

N. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

O. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.

P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.

Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010 w/Errata.

R. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; American Welding Society; 2008.

S. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

T. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

U. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).



1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net

weld lengths.

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.


A. Design miscellaneous metal fabrications under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.

C. Plates: ASTM A283.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33.

F. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.

H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.

D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish. 1. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches members spaced at 20 inches. 2. Rungs: one inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center.



3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface.

B. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.

C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish.

D. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.

E. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish.

2.05 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is

required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.

C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

D. Prime Painting: One coat.

E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

2.06 FINISHES - ALUMINUM

A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I color anodized.

B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.

C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.

2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.



B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 06 10 00 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.

B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

C. Preservative treated wood materials.

D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.

E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing.

B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.


A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

B. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2012.

C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce; 2010.

D. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.


A. See Section 01 70 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.



2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

D. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2.

E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity

and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category

UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.

C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual.

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end.



3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

E. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.

B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board

parallel to studs. 2. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation

facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 06 41 00 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

SECTION 06 41 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Countertops.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.

B. Section 06 61 00 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Cast plastic countertops.

D. Section 09 90 0 – Painting and Coating: Site finishing.


A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.

B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).

C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).

D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 3. Include certification program label.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.


A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.

B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

C. Cabinets at Executive bathroom: 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 3. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option. 4. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.



5. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel. 6. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless. 7. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft..

a. Deflection: L/144. 8. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. 9. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation; ____: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar; ____: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart, LLC; ____: www.wilsonart.com.

B. Provide specific types as scheduled. 1. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled,

finish as scheduled.

2.04 COUNTERTOPS

A. Cultured Stone Surfacing: Specified in Section 06 61 00.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.

B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness.

C. Glass: Type A as specified in Section 08 80 00.

D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.

D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.

E. Catches: Magnetic.

F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish. 1. Products:

a. Grass America Inc; ____: www.grassusa.com. b. Hardware Resources; _____: www.hardwareresources.com. c. Julius Blum, Inc; _____: www.blum.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.



E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.

2.08 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.

C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent:

a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 06 61 00 - 1 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06 61 00

SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cast plastic washroom vanities, washroom vanities with integral sink, and counter top. The Executive bathroom will be fitted with real stone countertop.


A. Section 06 41 00- Architectural Woodwork: Cabinetry


A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design all countertops with sufficient strength for handling and placement stresses.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials, colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, design load parameters, methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages.

C. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Samples: Submit two samples representative of vanity top, 6x6 inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation of opening required, rough-in sizes; provide templates for cast-in or placed frames or anchors; tolerances for item placement, temporary bracing of components .

F. Maintenance Data: Indicate list of approved cleaning materials and procedures required; list of substances that are harmful to the component materials. 1. Include instructions for stain removal, surface and gloss restoration .

G. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Polishing Cream: 16 oz.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all countertops.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cast Plastic Fabrications: 1. Basis of Design: Corian or approved equal. . 2. Integral sinks; Product Model 810. 3. Or approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide finished products having flame spread index of 35 and smoke developed index of 15, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 in thickness of 3/4 inch.


60654 / AACDPW 06 61 00 - 2 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS

B. Resin: Polyester type, with integral coloring, stain resistant to domestic chemicals and cleaners.

C. Polishing Cream: Compatible polishing cream to achieve specified sheen to gel coat.

D. Core Framing: Softwood lumber, clear and free of knots.

E. Adhesive: as recommended by manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components by mold to achieve shape and configuration.

B. Gel coat the finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to a gloss sheen.

C. Radius corners and edges.

D. Cure components prior to shipment, except sheet materials requiring site handling.

2.04 FINISH

A. Color: as selected.

B. Exposed to View Surface Visual Texture: From manufacturer's complete standard finishes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable.

C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Align work plumb and level.

C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 07 90 05 - 1 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 90 05

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.

B. Precompressed foam sealers.


C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.

D. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.


A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.

B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.

C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.

D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.

E. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, and limitations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.


A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Procurement Documents, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product and Substitutions Requirements.

B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.



2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product and Substitutions Requirements.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

B. Type ___ - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

3. Products: a. Bostik Inc; ____: www.bostik-us.com. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound:

www.pecora.com. c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; ____:

www.buildingsystems.basf.com.

C. Type ___ - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

2. Products: a. Bostik Inc; ____: www.bostik-us.com. b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; ____:

www.buildingsystems.basf.com. c. Pecora Corporation; 898NST Sanitary Silicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com. d. Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP: www.usa-sika.com. e. Tremco Global Sealants; ____: www.tremcosealants.com.

D. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G, O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35. 5. Products:

a. Bostik Inc; ____: www.bostik-us.com. b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant:

www.pecora.com. c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; ____:

www.buildingsystems.basf.com.

E. Type ___ - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Products:

a. Bostik Inc; ____: www.bostik-us.com.



b. Dow Corning Corporation; ______: www.dowcorning.com.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 08 11 13 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.


A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

B. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating: Field painting.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

B. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.

C. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.


A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.

C. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.

D. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.

E. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.

F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

G. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

H. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009 (ANSI).

I. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

J. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.

K. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.

L. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2007.

M. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; current edition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.



B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes installation requirements.


A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door; _____, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors; ____: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product and Substitutions Requirements.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the

following requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel conforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated. 4. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as

indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard. 6. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and

NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

7. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames. a. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: Provide at least A25/ZF75

(galvannealed) for interior applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) or G60/Z180 (galvanized) for corrosive locations.

8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.

a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 1 Door Frames: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum thickness.

b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 1, 18 gage, 0.042 inch.

2. Finish: Same as for door.



3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.

4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Knockdown type.

D. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door.

E. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, with profile similar to jambs.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.

B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.

D. Coordinate installation of hardware.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 08 14 16 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 14 16

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Bullet-resistant sheathing and wallboard for bullet-resistant partitions and walls.

D. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating: Field finishing of doors.


A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.

B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.

D. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

F. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

D. Specimen warranty.

E. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 6 by 6 inch in size cut from top corner of door.

F. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.


A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Procurement Documents, for additional warranty requirements.



B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.

C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Doors: 1. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries; ____: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Haley Brothers; ____: www.haleybros.com.

2.02 DOORS

A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Standard Duty performance, in accordance with

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Wood veneer facing for field opaque finish .

2.03 DOOR CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated.

2.04 DOOR FACINGS

A. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Closed grain hardwood veneer.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Louvers: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish manufactured by Pemko - Assa Abloy or approved equal: 1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; pre-painted finish to door color. 2. Louver Blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof, light proof.

2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent:

a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose. b. Sheen: Satin.

B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.

C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 08 71 00 ‐ 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Finish Hardware for wood swinging doors.

B. Provide all components including fasteners, brackets and accessories required for complete, properly functioning and operable openings.

C. Field verify all hinge and strike dimensions at existing frames for hardware compatibility.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts & Hinges

ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers

ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks and Latches

ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials and Finishes

C. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design

D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)

Keying Systems and Nomenclature

Sequence and Format

Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide 6 copies of catalog cuts indicating design, grade and function of all hardware items in the hardware sets. Highlight in some manner only those items appropriate to the hardware schedule.

B. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 copies of a detailed hardware schedule in vertical format as outlined in DHI “Sequence and Format”. Include the following: 1. Door numbers corresponding to Architects door numbers. 2. Include abbreviations list, manufacturer’s product list and Door x HW Sets. 3. Include detailed wiring diagrams, specially developed for each opening, indicating all

electric hardware, security and access control equipment. 4. Mounting Locations 5. Door and Frame sizes and types

E. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame suppliers and others as applicable to ensure timely and accurate door preps and reinforcing. Submit Templates, wiring diagrams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule” to electrical provider, for coordination and verification of voltages, functions, locations and integration with access control.

F. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01 70 00 including specific requirements indicated.

G. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 1 set in a three ring binder containing the following:

1. Copy of final keying schedule.

2. Catalog pages for each product.



3. Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed".

4. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each electrified hardware item 5. One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.


A. Statement of qualification for distributor and installers. 1. Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility. 2. Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with experience in the distribution of commercial

hardware. Must have an office and warehouse facility within Seventy-Five mile radius of the project.

3. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule.

4. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with experienced in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project.

5. Regulatory Label Requirements as Required: Provide testing agency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings.

6. Fire-Rated Openings: Fire-rated openings shall be provided with fire-rated hardware in compliance with NFPA 80. Provide only hardware tested and listed by U/L, for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels.

7. Underwriters Laboratories requirements have precedence over this specification where conflicts exist.

8. Single Source Responsibility:

a. Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware.

9. Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting with Owner to determine keying requirements.

10. Field verify all existing frame dimensions for hinges and strikes prior to submittal submission for compatibility with hardware and hardware installation. Furnish prep fillers if required for compatibility with new hardware.


A. Marking and Packaging: Mark each item or package separately, with identification corresponding to the hardware sets and door numbers.

B. Deliver individually packaged and properly marked finish hardware in a timely manner to avoid delays in construction or installation. At time of delivery, inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.

C. Storage: Store hardware in a clean, secured, dry area on shelving.


A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents.

B. Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Refer to General Conditions of the Construction Contract

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

Closers: Ten (10) years

Locksets & Cylinders: Five (5) years



All other Hardware: Two (2) years

1.08 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION:

A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with Division 1. Manufacturers listed with asterisks are used in the Hardware Sets. Item Manufacturer Acceptable Hinges *Stanley Bommer, Lawrence Locksets/ Cylinders *Best Existing Closers *Stanley LCN, Sargent Protection Plates *Trimco Burns, Ives Stops *Trimco Glynn Johnson, Rixson

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Hinges: 1. Furnish hinges with template screw hole locations. 2. Furnish 5 Knuckle heavy weight ball bearing stainless steel. 3. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in

height or fraction thereof. 4. Furnish heavy weight 5 inch x 4.5 inch hinges for doors over 36 inches wide. 5. Certified to ANSI/ BHMA A156.1. 6. Furnish hinge sizes and gauges according to manufacturers recommendations for weight,

thickness and width of doors, unless otherwise indicated in the hardware sets. 7. Outswing lockable doors to have NRP hinges. 8. Exterior lockable hinges to have NRP Non Removable Pins. 9. Width of hinges shall be sufficient to clear trim and wall conditions as shown on the

drawings. 11. Provide heavy weight hinges at all doors. 13. Furnish complying with NFPA 80 at rated openings

B. Locks and Latchsets: 1. Provide heavy duty mortise locksets and latchsets certified to ANSI A156.13, Series 1000,

Grade 1 Operational. Best 45H 15H, no substitution. 2. Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, 1/8” minimum lock case

thickness, containing components of steel with a Zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.

3. Locksets are to have a standard 2 3/4” backset with a full 3/4” throw. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.

4. Lock shall be easily handed without opening the lock case. 5. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to door to assure correct alignment a proper operation. 6. Furnish lock strike of sufficient lip length to clear frame and trim.

D. Door Closers: 1. Certified to ANSI / BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 3. Furnish extra-duty arms on all closers. 4. Furnish arms with built in stop at exterior doors. 5. Conform to ADA Standard for Accessible Design. 6. Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, back check and delayed action. 7. Furnish adapter plates, shim spacers, blade stop spacers and drop plates as required by

frame and door conditions. 8. Mount closers on non-public side of door, unless otherwise noted in specification.



9. Closers shall be non-sized and multi-sized adjustable to meet ADA. 10. Provide through bolts on wood doors without blocking and hollow metal doors without

reinforcing. 11. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors.

E. Kickplates: Furnish (8) eight inches high by width less (2) two inches on single doors push side, (1) inch less door width on pairs pull side mounted. Provide .050, (B4E), beveled four sides and countersunk holes, stainless steel.

F. Mop Plates: Furnish four (4) inches high by width less (2) two inches on single doors push side, (1) inch less door width on pairs pull side mounted. Provide .050, (B4E) beveled four sides and countersunk holes, stainless steel.

G. Stops: Floor or wall depending on conditions. Furnish with screws appropriate for wall or floor Conditions.

I. OH Stops: Furnish where wall stops not applicable.

2.3 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Cylinders: Manufacturer's Interchangeable Core type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Seven. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring.

B. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.

C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

2.4 KEYING

A. Provide keyed brass construction cores and keys during the construction period. Construction control and operating keys and core shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished in the same keyway (or key section) as the Owner's permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys (prepared according to the accepted keying schedule) will be furnished directly from the factory to the Owner.

B. Cylinders, removable and interchangeable core Best patented system: Best 7-pin CORMAX.

C. Key to existing Best system as directed by Owner, no substitutions.

D. Permanent keys and cores: Stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also be stamped "Do Not Duplicate."

E. Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered Mail, return receipt requested.

F. Furnish keys in the following quantities: 1. 2 each Masterkeys 2. 3 each Change keys each keyed core 3. 2 each Construction Masterkeys 4. 4 each Control keys

G. The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cores and return the construction cores to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cores and keys remain the property of the Hardware Supplier.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Interior Butt Hinges BHMA 630 (US32D)

Locks and Latches BHMA 626 (US26D)



Cylinders BHMA 626 (US26D)

Push/Pulls BHMA 630 (US32D)

Closers BHMA 689 (Alum Painted)

Protection Plates BHMA 630 (US32D)

Wall and Floor Stops BHMA 626 (US26D)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, related items, and conditions under which Work is to be performed, and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. .

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Examine rough-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

3.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.

B. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors.

C. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

B. Installed hardware using the manufacturer's fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products.

C. Exit devices and closers to be installed with through bolts.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. Field Services: After installation is complete, inspect completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete, properly adjusted and operating properly in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.

B. Report findings, in writing, to the Architect. Outline corrective actions and recommendations if required.

3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE:

HW Set 1 Women’s / Men’s Toilets

Doors: 100W, 100M, 101W, 101M, 102W, 102M, 103W, 103M, 104W, 104M

3 Hinge FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 630 ST

1 Push Plate 1018-3 630 TR

1 Pull Plate 1001-3 630 TR

1 Closer D-4551 pull side 689 ST

1 Kick Plate K0050 8" x 2" LDW B4E CSK 630 TR

1 Mop Plate KM050 4" x 1" LDW B4E CSK 630 TR

1 Stop 1270WV / 1211 AS REQ'D 630 TR

3 Silencers 1229A Grey TR



HW Set 2 Unisex Bathroom

Doors: 100A, 101A, 102A, 103A, 104A

3 Hinge FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 630 ST

1 Mortise Privacy Set 45 HOL15H with visual indicator 626 BE

1 Door Closer CLD-4551 with delayed action 689 ST

1 Kick Plate K0050 8" x 2" LDW B4E CSK 630 TR

1 Mop Plate KM050 4" x 1" LDW B4E CSK 630 TR

1 Stop 1270WV / 1211 AS REQ'D 630 TR


HW Set 3 Janitor

Doors: 100B, 101B, 102B, 103B, 104B

3 Hinge FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 630 ST

1 Lockset - storeroom 45H7 D15H Cormax 626 BE

1 Door Closer CLD-4551 with delayed action 689 ST

1 Kick Plate K0050 8" x 2" LDW B4E CSK 630 RO

1 Mop Plate KM050 4" x 1" LDW B4E CSK 630 RO

1 Stop 1270WV / 1211 AS REQ'D 630 TR


END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 21 16 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 21 16

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Metal channel ceiling framing.

D. Cementitious backing board.

E. Gypsum wallboard.

F. Joint treatment and accessories.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing, wood blocking product and execution requirements

B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.

C. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tile backing board.


A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.

B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.

C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012.

D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.

E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.

F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.

G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011.

H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

I. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a.

J. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.

K. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2014.

L. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.

M. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.

N. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.

O. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALS




B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 3 years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one leg

only. a. Products:

1) Same manufacturer as other framing materials.

C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.

D. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as indicated on drawings.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com. 2. National Gypsum Company; ____: www.nationalgypsum.com. 3. USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch.

3. Paper-Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas (toilet rooms): One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including shower ceilings and shower walls.



2. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products:

1) Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board. 3) USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

D. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board. b. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board. c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board.

C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant.

G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs.

E. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Toilet accessories. 6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.

D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials .

3.06 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.

B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas

specifically indicated. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction.

D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.



E. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

3.07 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 22 16 - 1 METAL LIGHT COVE

SECTION 09 22 16

METAL LIGHT COVE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes Metal (ceiling or wall panels or baffle systems) as shown on the drawings

B. Related Sections include the Following: (list applicable sections)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and brochures for each type of

specified component including detail drawings, and installation instructions. 2. Shop drawings shall show dimensions, sizes, thickness, alloys, tempers, finishes, joining,

attachments, and relationship of adjoining work.

B. Samples: 1. Samples shall include three, 6” pieces of each type of aluminum light cove and finish as

specified and accessories.

C. Certification: 1. Submit certification from manufacturer of accessory attesting that products comply with

specified requirements including finish as specified.

D. Qualification Data: 1. Firms specified in “Quality Assurance” Article must demonstrate their capabilities and

experience by including lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Manufacturer: Firm with manufacturing and delivery capacity required for the project, shall have successfully completed at least ten projects within the past five years, utilizing systems, materials and techniques as herein specified.

B. Fabricator must own and operate its own manufacturing facilities for all metal components. “Stick Built” or “Kit of Parts Systems” consisting of components from a variety of manufacturers will not be considered or accepted.

C. Manufacturer/Fabricator must own and operate its own Painting and Finishing facility to assure single source responsibility and quality control.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. All materials shall be protected during fabrication, shipment, site storage and erection to prevent damage to the finished work from other trades. Store accessories inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from the weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Gordon Interior Specialties Division, Gordon, Inc., LA, (800) 747-8954, www.gordoninteriors.com,

Columbia Architectural Products, Inc., MD (301) 937 4383, www.capacm.com, or approved equal.



B. The listed manufacturer shall not be construed as closing specifications to other prospective manufacturers, but rather as establishing a level of quality in a metal system. Other systems may be submitted for approval; as provided for in the specifications at least 10 working days prior to submission of bids. Companies desiring to submit a proposal shall submit all descriptive information of the system proposed including photographs and shop drawings of at least three projects similar in detail and scope.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded aluminum light cove manufactured from alloy 6063-T5 (ASTM B 221, ASTM B 221M).

B. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard inserts, support brackets, alignment devices, splices and end closures will all be furnished as a complete package with single source responsibility.

C. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. All metal shall be of the highest – grade commercial type.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide extruded aluminum light coves of design, profile and function as indicated. Select light coves to suit width and depth in 10’0” lengths to reduce the number of end joints.

B. Provide pre-welded, mitered corners where light cove changes direction or abuts other trims. Include end closures and alignment devices to provide tight joints.

C. Provide splice plates and accompanying thumbscrews to properly secure joints to prevent gaping and insure alignment. Exposed attachments are not acceptable. Gaps at joints are not acceptable when light coves are abutted end to end.

D. Provide mounting brackets designed to conform to the light coves as required and spaced 4’-0” (maximum) on center.

E. Light Coves must be perforated with a minimum of .0375 square inches per lineal foot of flange to properly bond with the bedding compound and drywall.

F. All attachment flanges are perforated to allow attachment to the structure of a minimum of 8” on center.

2.5 FINISHES

A. All material shall be furnished and finished with an Alodine Chromate Conversion coating suitable for priming and painting in the factory or field.

OR

A. All Light Coves shall be supplied with a sprayed water-borne, cross-linked baked acrylic finish.

B. Color is to be (list standard color and number). Custom Acrylic finish is to match __________.

C. All finishes shall meet or exceed all Clean Air Standards for EPA or State, and be USDA approved.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examination of Surfaces: Installer must examine conditions under which work is to be performed and must notify contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.

B. Verify that field measurements and block-out dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions, with governing regulations for Seismic Codes, and with the Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association standards applicable to work.

B. Install all system including suspension is compliance with ASTM C636-92, with hangers supported only from building structural members.



3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean all surfaces following installation. If necessary use only a mild soap or detergent solution such as TSP-90 or Ivory.

B. Replace coves having scratches, abrasions, or other defects with unblemished coves.

C. Maintenance per manufacturer’s finished maintenance instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protection of Light Cove Systems from damage by other trades after installation to be provided by general contractor.

3.5 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY

A. Variation from specification: Any variation from this specification resulting in additional cost to any other contractor or subcontractor on this project shall be the sole financial responsibility of the contractor for the work of this section.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 30 00 - 1 TILING

SECTION 09 30 00

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tile for wall applications.

B. Stone thresholds.

C. Ceramic accessories.

D. Ceramic trim.


A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.

B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.


A. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.

B. ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

C. ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

D. ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1.

F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2013.1.

H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2013.1.

I. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2013.1.

J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2013.1.

K. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.

L. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2013.1.

N. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

O. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1.

P. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1.


60654 / AACDPW 09 30 00 - 2 TILING

Q. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.

R. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.

S. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.

T. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

U. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.

V. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel; 2013.

W. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation - Version; 2013.1.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 – Product and Substituions Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination.


A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock-up is 4'x4'. 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.


60654 / AACDPW 09 30 00 - 3 TILING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.

B. Dal-Tile

C. Crossville

D. Shaw Floors

E. Or approved equal

F. Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent. 2. Size and Shape: 8" x 12". 3. Edges: Square. 4. Surface Finish: Matte glaze. 5. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile.

B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed.

2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.

C. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications:

a. At doorways where tile terminates. b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4, ANSI A118.15, or _____. 1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond

coat is indicated. 2. Products:

a. Ardex Engineered Cements; : www.ardex.com b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com. c. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com.

2.04 GROUTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com.

B. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7. 1. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not intended as waterproofing. 1. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum. 2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum.


60654 / AACDPW 09 30 00 - 4 TILING

B. Mesh Tape: 2-inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.

E. Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints and corners with material used to set tiles.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.

G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

H. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.

I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.

K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.

M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.


60654 / AACDPW 09 30 00 - 5 TILING

3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. On exterior walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, thin-set over cementitious backer units, with waterproofing membrane.

B. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms.

C. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W245.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 51 00 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

B. Acoustical units.


A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.


A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.

B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.

C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.

C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.

E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 6 inches long, of suspension system main runner.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.


A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com.

B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.



C. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Composition: Wet felted. 4. Edge: Tegular. 5. Surface Color: White. Color: Black where indicated. 6. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 7. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product and Substitutions Requirements.

B. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.

C. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type ____: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. Color: Black where indicated.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of

grid.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360.

B. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size.

C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.

D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently.

H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.



I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.

C. Lay directional patterned units with pattern parallel to longest room axis.

D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

G. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.

H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.

I. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Office Areas: 24 x 24 inch acoustical units with interlocking suspension grid.

B. Locker Room, Toilet Room Areas: 24 x 24 inch cleanable acoustical units, interlocking exposed T suspension grid.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 67 00 - 1 ACRYLIC FLOORING

SECTION 09 67 00

ACRYLIC FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provisions established within the Contract, Division 1, General Requirements, the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

B. Related sections Section 09 90 00 Special Protective Wall Coatings.

1.02 Products installed but not furnished under this section:

B. 07 90 05 – Joint Sealers: Control joints, expansion joints and doorframes.

C. 22 13 00 – Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Floor grates.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The MasterTop 1851 SRS CF floor topping system shall be 1/8" thick MASTERTOP SRS 61BC Self-Leveling (color and texture selected by owner), with appropriate Primer and Topcoat.

B. The MasterTop 1851 SRS CF topping system shall cure and be available to normal traffic in no more than 60 minutes at 68° F. after application of last coat. It shall have a maximum water absorption value of 0.04 weight percent in accordance with ASTM D570.It shall be chemically resistant to a wide range of acids, alkalis, salts, fats, oils, and other chemicals.

C. The finished floor coating system shall be uniform in color, texture, and appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edge. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges.

D. See Paragraph 3.3 and/or 3.07 for number and thicknesses of each coat/layer in each system.


A. NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete

B. ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

C. ACI 302.1R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer’s technical information and installation details to describe materials to be used. The same manufacturer shall supply all polymer underlayments wall and floor finishes.

B. Submit manufacturer’s certificate of compliance that materials meet specification requirements.

C. Before beginning work, samples of the flooring system shall be provided for architect’s approval.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. BASF Corporation 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55375 Phone: 800-433-9517 2. No request for substitution shall be considered that would change the generic type of

coating system specified (i.e., 100% reactive, Methyl Methacrylate based acrylic liquid). Equivalent materials of other manufacturer's may be substituted only on approval of the Architect or Engineer. Requests shall include the respective manufacturer's technical literature for each product giving the name, generic type, descriptive information, recommended dry film thickness (DFT), Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and certified test reports showing results to equal performance criteria of products specified herein.



3. Manufacturer must show a minimum 10 year history of manufacturing MMA products for the specified application. Manufacturer must show a minimum of 10 projects of equal size and magnitude as this project.

B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Pre-qualification requirements: Each bidder for this project shall be pre-qualified and

approved by the material manufacturer at the time of bid submittal. Acceptability will include judgment on equipment, history, and financial strength. In no case will BASF Building Systems permit the application of any of its materials by untrained, non-approved Contractor or personnel.

2. Each approved applicator shall have been trained by the Manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the specified flooring system(s). Approved applicator must possess proper surface preparation equipment as recommended by manufacturer.

3. Each approved applicator must have five years experience of installing the specified flooring system and submit a list of five projects/references as a prequalification requirement. At least one of the five projects/references must be of equal size, quantity, and magnitude to this project as a prequalification requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projects/references to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalification requirement.

C. Acceptance Sample: 1. A minimum one-foot square representative sample of the specified flooring system shall

be prepared by the Manufacturer's representative and submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the project. All bidders shall inspect the "acceptance sample" before submitting their bids.

2. The installed flooring system shall be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective film layers, color, texture, overall appearance and finish.

D. Bond Testing: 1. Surface preparation efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior

to application of the flooring system(s). 2. See paragraph 3.03 or consult with Material Manufacturer for specific procedure.

E. Pre-Job Meeting 1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator,

and Material Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this specification, application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules. Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner.

1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

A. Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer’s original unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s name, product and color.

B. Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 50 degrees F or above 80 degrees F.


A. Evaluate the substrate condition, including moisture content and extent of substrate leveling and repairs required, if any.

B. Coordinate flooring work with other trades to ensure adequate illumination, ventilation, and dust free environment during application and curing of flooring.

C. Comply with material manufacturer’s recommended temperature limitations for flooring application.

1.09 WARRANTY:

A. Contractor shall furnish a written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of ( ) year from date of installation.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER:

A. BASF Corporation

889 Valley Park Drive

Shakopee, MN 55379

Customer Service: 800- 433-9517

Technical Service: 800-243-6739

Direct Phone: 952-496-6000

Internet: www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us

B. Approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS:

A. MasterTop 1851 SRS CF Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) Acrylic Resin System: 1. Saturating Primer/Sealer Coat:

MasterTop SRS 41P 2. Coving (if required): MasterTop SRS 61BC Self-Leveling with appropriate filler 3. Patching/Sloping (if required) MasterTop 1817 SRS PC Polymer Concrete 4. Topping:

MASTERTOP SRS 61BC Self-Leveling, consisting of MasterTop SRS 61BC Self-Leveling resin and MasterTop SRS 100SL with Colored Flake broadcast.

5. Topcoat: MasterTop SRS 71TC Colorless Topcoat Resin

6. Pigment: Color to compliment Colored Flake. 7. MasterTop Colored Flake for broadcasting: Color/s to be chosen by owner.

2.02.1 PRODUCT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. MasterTop SRS 41P Primer/Sealer 1. Percentage Reactive Resin: 100% Percentage Solids 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): less than 0.6 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) 3550 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): 2.1 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): .000035 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122), g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: 1.4

B. MasterTop 1817 SRS PC Polymer Concrete 1. Percentage of reactive resin 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): 0.02 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) 1200 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): 1.2 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696) psi x10-6: 18 6. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C39) 7,000 (ASTM C109) 9,200

C. MasterTop SRS 61BC Self-Leveling Topping 1. Percentage of reactive resin: 100% Percentage of solids: 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): 0.04



3. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C109): 6,000-8,000 (ASTM D695): 6,000 4. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): 1,050 5. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): 720,000 6. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): 3,500 7. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): .000019 8. Electrical Resistivity, (ASTM D257) Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: 1014

D. MasterTop SRS 71TC Colorless Topcoat Resin 1. Percentage Reactive Resin: 100% Percentage Solids: 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): 0.04 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): 3555 4. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): 210,000 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) .000035 in./in. Deg. F 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: 1.43 8. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543:

Effect of weak acids: none Effect of strong acids: slight Effect of alkalis: none Effect of salt solutions: none Effect of oil, grease: none Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): none

2.02.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION & APPLICATION CRITERIA

A. All SRS MasterTop SRS Material Systems: 1. Pot Life at 68° F.: 10-15 minutes 2. Cure Time at 68° F.: 60 minutes 3. Recoat Time at 68° F.: 60-90 minutes

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Concrete must have a curing period of 28 days minimum at 70° F. The surface must be clean and dry, physically sound and free of contamination. Surfaces must be free of holes, voids or defects. Cracks and abrupt changes in surface profile must be corrected. Fins and projections must be removed. All curing compounds and sealers must be removed.

B. Verify that moisture content is within range acceptable to flooring manufacturer, using calcium chloride test kit in accordance with ASTM F-1869.

C. Contractor must report, in writing, surfaces left in improper condition by other trades. Application will constitute acceptance of surfaces by the applicator.

3.02 PREWORK INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces to be coated with MMA material systems and report to the Owner and/or Engineer any conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these coating systems and that cannot be put into acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified in Paragraph 3.03.

B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Engineer.

C. In the event that Applicator has employed all acceptable methods of surface preparation and cannot remedy adverse conditions that would lead to failure of the installation, Applicator shall withdraw from the contract and Owner will be financially responsible only for preparation efforts.



3.03 PREPARATION:

A. Surface Preparation - General 1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray,

and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blow-down.

2. New concrete: See 1.08 - C for requirements. 3. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser,

detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper.

4. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing.

B. Bond Testing 1. The applicator shall evaluate all surface preparation by conducting bond tests at strategic

locations. 2. Mix six (6) ounces of the primer to be used in the application with #10-#12 mesh, dry

quartz sand until an easily trowelable mixture is obtained. Add 10% by volume SRS 100HD and mix well. Apply palm-sized patties 1/8" to 1/4" thick.

3. After one (1) hour at (68° F.), patties must be cured tack-free and cooled to ambient temperature of concrete. Remove patties with hammer and chisel and examine fracture/delamination plane. Concrete with fractured aggregate must be attached to the entire underside of the patty.

4. If only laitance or a small amount of concrete is attached or if interface between patty and substrate is tacky, further substrate preparation is required.

5. If further surface preparation is required, bond tests shall be conducted again when this has been completed.

6. If no amount or kind of surface preparation produces satisfactory bond tests, the applicator shall report that to the Owner, Engineer, and Manufacturer.

C. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning 1. The MasterTop SRS system requires a CSP 4-5 in accordance with ICRI CSP Surface

Preparation Standards. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned using a mobile steelshot, dust recycling machine such as BLASTRAC, as manufactured by Wheelabrator Corp., or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate.

2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment.

3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum.

4. Conduct Bond Tests to check adequacy of surface preparation. See Paragraph 3.03 - B (Bond Testing).

5. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or other contamination of the surface occurs.

3.04 INSTALLATION:

A. Application of MasterTop 1851 SRS CF Colored Flake Flooring System consists of: 1. Applying the primer/sealer, 2. Applying coving (if required), 3. Performing patching and sloping with MasterTop 1817 SRS PC system (if required), 4. Re-priming MasterTop 1817 SRS PC areas



5. Applying the topping, broadcasting the Colored Flake, 6. Applying the topcoat,

Time for curing (45 - 60 minutes) shall be allowed between each coat. Thicknesses are specified below and/or in Paragraph 3.07.

B. Open only the containers of component materials to be use in each specific application as needed. Refer to Manufacturer's data sheets for pot-life/temperature relationship to determine size of batches to mix and mix ratios for each respective coat of the system.

C. Measure, add, and mix the initiator (SRS 100HD) into the respective resin components in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer. Pot life is short, so mix only as much material at a time as can be easily and efficiently applied.

3.04.1 PRIME COAT

A. Measure, add, and mix the MasterTop SRS 103IN, and initiator (MasterTop SRS 100HD) into the respective resin components in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer.

B. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9" or 18" wide, 1/2" - 3/4" thick-napped, solvent-resistant paint roller to roll out the material at a rate of 100 sq. ft./ gal. to form a uniform, continuous film, ensuring that all crevices, cracks, other surface discontinuities have been saturated and coated. Use a paint brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10 -15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations.

C. Allow the primer/sealer coat to cure.

D. If any of the concrete has absorbed all of the primer or if the concrete still has a dry look, re-prime these areas before applying bodycoat or topcoat.

3.04.2 COVING (If Required)

A. Surface Preparation 1. If concrete walls are to be painted prior to installation of cove base, the bottom portion of

the walls shall remain un-coated to the height of the cove base to insure a proper bond to the concrete wall.

2. If walls are constructed of a non-compatible material or if a coating exists, a backer board of ¼” plexiglass or ½” cement board cut to the desired height of the cove base needs to be installed. The top of the backer board should be cut at a 45� angle to create a “beveled” edge.

3. If a backer board needs to be installed it shall be fastened using a high grade construction adhesive as well as counter sunk screws or concrete masonry anchors.

B. System Description 1. Cove base shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations and shall be

one of two systems: 1.1. MasterTop 1815 SRS CB or MasterTop 1815 SRS RG cove base consisting of

“spooned in” radius and brush on body coat. 1.2. Trowel-On Cove Base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a

termination strip installed at the top of the base. 2. Cove base will receive a broadcast and top coat consistent with flooring system.

3.04.3 PATCHING/SLOPING (If Required)

A. Measure, add, and mix the MasterTop 1817 SRS PC (MasterTop SRS 17RS Part A resin and MasterTop SRS 17RS Part B powder Component), and necessary aggregate (if required) in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer.

B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to slope any areas as needed.

C. Once cured, material must be re-primed before topping system is applied.



3.04.4 TOPPING

A. Size the batches, and mix according to Manufacturer's instructions. The entire batch should be poured and spread at once, i.e., do not let material set in pail.

B. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 1/8”. Lightly trowel to a uniform thickness of 1/8” as necessary.

C. Immediately after application, roll with a porcupine roller available from the Manufacturer to release any trapped air from the topping.

D. Broadcast Colored Flake into the fresh material before it begins to cure. It is important that the flake "rains" down, and not be thrown into, the surface.

E. Allow the topping to cure.

F. Remove excess Flake by sweeping and vacuuming

3.04.5 TOP COAT

A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 90 - 100 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Primer/Sealer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.01.

B. Allow topcoat to cure.

3.04.6 SECOND TOPCOAT

A. Apply with clean rollers at a rate of 100 - 125 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Primer/Sealer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.3.1.

B. Allow topcoat to cure.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL/INSPECTION

A. Applicator shall request acceptance of surface preparation from the Engineer before application of the prime/seal coat.

B. Applicator shall request acceptance of the prime/seal coat from the Engineer before application of subsequent specified materials.

C. All work not acceptable to the Architect, Engineer, or Owner must be corrected before consideration of final acceptance.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Applicator shall remove any material spatters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove masking and covers taking care not to contaminate surrounding area.

B. Applicator shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort.

3.07 COATING SCHEDULE

A. Primer shall be MasterTop SRS 41P. Application rate shall be approx.100 sq.ft. per gallon (approx. 12 mils).

B. Coving shall be MASTERTOP SRS 61BC Self-Leveling with appropriate filler installed per manufacturers recommendations

C. Patching/Sloping material shall be MasterTop 1817 SRS PC

C. Body coat shall be MASTERTOP SRS 61BC Self-Leveling applied with a gauge rake set at 1/8" for a rate of 40 sq. ft. per batch. Colored Flake to be broadcast into the uncured topping. Broadcast the Colored Flake at the rate of .15 pounds per sq. ft.

D. Clear topcoat shall be MASTERTOP SRS 71TC; apply at the rate of 90 - 100 sq. ft. per gallon for the first coat and 100 - 125 sq. ft. per gallon for the second application.

3.07 MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS

A. For more specific information concerning maintaining Methyl Methacrylate floors please consult the manufacturer at the above location.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 09 90 00 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints and other coatings.

C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment. 2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 3. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that

are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.

d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.


A. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

C. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.


A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012.

C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007.

D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints and Coatings; 2013.

1.05 SUBMITTALS




B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description

of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all

substitutions proposed.

C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing

samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.

D. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.

E. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 2x2 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

F. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.

G. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification.

H. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.

I. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. 2. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum 3 years experience.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.



E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

C. Paints, transparent finishes, stains, primers, sealers, and block fillers: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Company.www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com. 3. Glidden Professional, a product of PPG Architectural Coatings:

www.gliddenprofessional.com. 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 6. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.

D. Colors: As indicated on drawings 1. Selection to be made by Owner after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without

additional cost to Owner. 3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the

wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Paint I-OP - All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, concrete masonry, brick, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.

B. Paint I-OP-MD-DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including metals, wood, and ______: 1. Two top coats and one coat primer.



C. Paint I-OP-MD-WC - Medium Duty Vertical/Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete, concrete masonry, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, and ______. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.

D. Paint I-OP-HD - Heavy Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete, concrete masonry, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, and _______. 1. Applications: See Finish Schedule. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer; primer may be omitted if top coat manufacturer

approves. 3. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.

E. Paint I-OP-FL - Concrete and Wood Floors Indicated to be Painted. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer.

F. Paint WI-TR-V - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer. 2. Satin: One coat of varnish.

G. Paint CI-OP-3A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

H. Paint MI-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

I. Paint MI-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

J. Paint MgI-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

K. Paint CI-OP-3Af - Concrete/Masonry, Alkyd Floor Enamel, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkali resistant primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd floor enamel.

L. Paint CI-OP-3E - Concrete/Masonry, Epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of catalyzed epoxy enamel.

M. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.

N. Paint FI-OP-3A - Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

I. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).

J. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

K. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

L. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.


A. Owner will provide field inspection.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS

A. See Finish Schedule.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 10 14 00 - 1 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs.


A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009 (ANSI).

D. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.

2. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.

E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips.

F. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.

C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.


A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs: 1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.


60654 / AACDPW 10 14 00 - 2 SIGNAGE

2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 4 inches, X length required. 5. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those

shown on the drawings. 6. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers

to be determined later, and braille.

2.03 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Radiused. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Concealed or exposed screws.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: To be selected from manufacturers standard colors. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal.

B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60

inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 10 21 13.19 - 1 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 21 13.19

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Solid plastic toilet compartments.

B. Urinal & privacy screens.


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.

C. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.


A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.


A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, door swings.

C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 6x6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Ampco Products, Inc; ______: www.ampco.com. 2. Metpar Corp; _____: www.metpar.com. 3. Basis of Design: Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capital):

www.scrantonproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE), floor-mounted unbraced.

B. Doors: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: 24 inch. 3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 55 inch.

C. Panels: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Height: 55 inch.

D. Pilasters: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch.


60654 / AACDPW 10 21 13.19 - 2 PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENTS

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded phenolic plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: As selected from Manufacturer's complete standard colors..

B. Urinal Screens & Privacy Screens: Wall mounted with continuous panel bracket. Same material and color as toilet compartments.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with

pilaster.

B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets.

C. Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel.

D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.

E. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door

latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.

C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.

E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch.

B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.

3.05 SCHEDULES

A. See drawings for locations

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 10 21 13.19 - 3 PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENTS


60654 / AACDPW 10 28 00 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 28 00

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms.

B. Electric hand dryers.

C. Grab bars.


A. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates.

B. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.

C. Section 10 21 13.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013.

B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2014e1.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011e1.

F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.

G. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).


A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories. Basis of Design: BoBrick.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Electric Hand/Hair Dryers. Basis of Design: 1. Dyson AirBlade dB.



2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 10 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 or 316.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.

F. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.

G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.

I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

C. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel, spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. 1. Attached Purse Shelf: 0.03 inch satin finished stainless steel, with rolled or formed edge

at front.

B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, semi-recessed, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock. 1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum.

C. Electric Dryers: 1. Operation: Touch-free infra red activation. 2. Style: Hands down, airblade technology with HEPA filter, 50% less noise. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Cover: White plastic.

a. Polycarbonate-ABS casing. b. Antibacterial coating type: Antibacterial molded additive in fascia and blades. c. Galvanized steel back plate, mounting bracket. d. Exterior screw type: Anti-tamper M6 machine screw. e. Water ingress protection to IP35.

5. Air Speed at apertures: 420 mph. 6. Operating airflow: Up to 9.25 gallons/s and up to 74.2 CFM. 7. Rated operating noise power: 81 db(A). 8. Hand dry time measurement: 12 seconds. 9. Input voltage: Low Voltage 110-127v, High Voltage 208-240V. 10. Frequency: Low Voltage=50 or 60 Hz, subject to voltage (85-115v at 50 Hz; 85-130 v at

60 Hz); High Voltage=50 & 60 Hz 11. Rated power: 1400 w. 12. Motor speed: 92,000 rpm. 13. Motor switching rate: 6,100 per second.



14. Standby power consumption: Less than 0.5 w. 15. Filter: Double-life HEPA filter (glass fiber and fleece prelayer). Bacteria removal: 99.97% at 0.3 microns. 16. Accreditations: Carbon Trust, HACCP International, NSF International P335, ADA. 17. Warranty: 5 years parts and 1 year limited labor warranty.

D. Soap Dispensers:

Automatic Lavatory Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser Package: Bright polished chrome plated plastic with LED light indicators. Red blinking LED indicates soap level is low, yellow blinking indicates battery is low. Equipped with integral plastic shank. The package shall include, automatic soap dispenser with capability of 54fl-oz refill , 4 alkaline D cell batteries, 54 fl-oz soap refill and all related accessories to start up. 1. Minimum Capacity: 54 ounces.

Wall mounted (for unisex restrooms), liquid soap dispenser, wall mounted, vertical, stainless steel housing with satin finish; stainless operating level, metal lock and key, soap level indicator, interchangeable plastic containers with plastic pumps. Overall width shall not be more than 4” 1. Minimum Capacity: 17 ounces.

E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers, each side.

F. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.

G. Baby Changing Station: Koala stainless steel clad surface mounted horizontal baby changing station with polyethylene interior. Full length steel –on-steel hinges with 11 gauge steel mounting bracket eliminating plastic wear points and providing superior child protection and durability. Gas spring mechanism. Built in liner cavity and two bag hooks. Child safety straps. Bed surface to contains Microban antimicrobial, reducing odor causing bacteria. Liner dispenser to hold 15 liners. ADA compliant.

H. Coat Hook with bumper: Solid cast aluminum with matte finish. Hard rubber secured with drive screw. Protects wall or partition surface.

I. Mirror with stainless steel frame: See drawings for size. Type 430 stainless steel with bright polished finish. Mitered corners. Frame screw to permit easy replacement of glass. 1/ 4” no.1 quality of glass mirror; warranted against silver spoilage for 15 years. Galvanized steel back.

2.05 SHOWER ACCESSORIES

A. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, surface-mounted with drain holes, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrate and backplate.

B. Towel Bar: Stainless steel Type 304, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish.

C. Towel Ring: Stainless steel, 2-1/2 inch extension from wall, with 1/4 inch diameter trapezoidal shaped ring, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.

D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.



2.06 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. 1. Drying rod: Stainless steel, 1/4 inch diameter. 2. Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 3. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 4. Length: 36 inches. 5. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders/hooks.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. For electrically-operated accessories, verify that electrical power connections are ready and in the correct locations.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows:

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. See Toilet Rooms on drawings for toilet room accessories.

B. Provide shelf/ mop broom holders in each Janitor Closet on the drawings.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 1

COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

2. Sleeves.

3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

4. Formed steel channel.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color-coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.


A. Perform Work in accordance with The State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Identification Material: Comply with requirements of Section 22 05 53.

2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Access doors and frames: Comply with requirements of Section 08 31 13.

2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers and Supports: Provide hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment complying with Section 22 05 29

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 1

Hangers And Supports For

Plumbing Piping And Equipment

SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Pipe hangers and supports.

2. Hanger rods.

3. Inserts.

4. Sleeves.

5. Mechanical sleeve seals.

6. Formed steel channel.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

2. Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section.

3. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section.

4. Section 22 14 00 - Facility Storm Drainage: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

3. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. FM Global:

1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

2. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 2



B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data:

1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:

1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.

2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.



1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

1.10 BASIS OF DESIGN AND ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listed first in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on the identified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to utilize a manufacturer or product which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear all efforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to achieve finished work which is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted in the Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/or types, new material and/or equipment, and changes to structural and/or architectural features (including room sizes). Approval by the Engineer of a proposed item shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

B. The listing of specific manufacturers is solely intended to identify reputable manufacturers who are known to provide quality products of the general type specified. Such listing is in no way intended to imply that the identified manufacturer’s product(s) have been verified to satisfy the specified requirements, or to be equivalent to any identified Basis of Design manufacturer. Nor does such a listing imply acceptance of products which do not meet the specified requirements, ratings, features, dimensions, and functions as indicated.


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 3



1.11 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Anvil Inc.

2. Carpenter & Paterson Inc.

3. Michigan Hanger Co.

4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Plumbing Piping - DWV:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches (75 mm) and Smaller: Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

6. Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches (76 mm) and Smaller: Cast iron hook.

8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

11. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.

2.02 HANGER RODS

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.

2.03 INSERTS

B. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 4



2. B-Line Systems.

3. Unistrut Corp.


C. Product Description: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.04 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage (0.5 mm) thick galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick galvanized steel.

C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil (1.2 mm) thick sheet compatible with roofing.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) minimum; 16 gage (1.5 mm) at fire resistant elements.

2.05 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.

C. Sealant: Refer to Section 07 90 05.

2.06 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.

2. NMP Corporation.

3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.07 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.

2. B-Line Systems.

3. Unistrut Corp.


B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage (2.8 mm) thick steel, with holes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on center.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.05 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 5



D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

E. Do not drill or cut structural members.

3.03 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches (100 mm) and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 22 07 00.

3.05 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4- inches (87 mm) thick and extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00.

B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

3.06 INSTALLATION - FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches (250 mm) clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch (910 x 910 mm) sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

C. Seal floor, shower, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 00 - 6



3.07 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

C. Extend sleeves through floors 1- inch (25 mm) above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.09 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.11 SCHEDULES

PIPE HANGER SPACING

PIPE MATERIAL

MAXIMUM

HANGER SPACING

Feet (m)

HANGER ROD

DIAMETER

Inches (mm)

Cast Iron (All Sizes) 5 (1.5) 5/8 (15)

Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot (3 m) length of pipe

10 (3) 5/8 (15)

Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) and smaller 6 (1.8) 1/2 (13)

Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and larger 10 (3) 1/2 (13)

Steel, 3 inches (75 mm) and smaller 12 (3.7) 1/2 (13)

Steel, 4 inches (100 mm) and larger 12 (3.7) 5/8 (15)

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR

PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.

2. Tags.

3. Pipe markers.

4. Labels.


1. Section 22 11 00 – Facility Water Distribution

2. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage

3. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.


A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systems and accessories.

B. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.

C. Perform Work in accordance with The State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.








1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Seton Identification Products Model

2. Craftmark Identification Systems.

3. Safety Sign Co.

4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on yellow contrasting background color.

C. Terminology: Match indentifying Number from drawings and schedules.

2.02 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags Manufacturers :



3. Safety Sign Co.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter.

C. Valve Tag Securing Device: Number 6 brass bead chain; provide one securing device for each tag in accepted schedule, secure with brass S-hooks.

D. Terminology: Match indentifying Number from drawings and schedules.

E. Metal Tags Manufacturers:






3. Safety Sign Co.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter with finished edges.

G. Valve Tag Securing Device: Number 6 brass bead chain; provide one securing device for each tag in accepted schedule, secure with brass S-hooks.

H. Terminology: Match indentifying Number from drawings and schedules.

2.03 VALVE TAG CHART

A. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size in anodized aluminum frame, list of applied tags and location. Provide mounting device.

2.04 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers Manufacturers:

1. Seton Identification Products; Model


3. Safety Sign Co.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements:

C. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering, minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers Manufacturers:



3. Safety Sign Co.


E. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings, minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

F. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers Manufacturers:



3. Safety Sign Co.


G. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service, with embedded continuous tracer wire for non-metallic pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.




E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

F. Identify water heaters with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.

G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 07 00 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories


1. Submittal Procedures: Section 01 30 00.

2. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Section 01 70 00

3. Facility Water Distribution: 22 11 00

4. Facility Sanitary Sewerage: 22 13 00

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 30 00-Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Section 017000-Execution and Closeout Requirements.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit literature, parts list and maintenance instructions.


A. Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements.

B. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84

C. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.

D. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.

E. Perform Work in accordance with The State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and Project conditions.


A. Where a specific manufacturer or product is identified as the Basis of Design or listed first in a list of acceptable manufacturers, the overall project design is based on the identified manufacturer or product. If the Contractor elects to utilize a manufacturer or product which differs from the identified Basis of Design, the Contractor shall bear all efforts and costs of any design changes necessary in order to achieve finished work which is equal in character, performance, and quality to the original design depicted in the Contract Documents. Such changes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: changes to ratings and/or features of other equipment, changes to material sizes and/or types, new material and/or equipment, and



changes to structural and/or architectural features (including room sizes). Approval by the Engineer of a proposed item shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.



A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:

1. CertainTeed.

2. Knauf.

3. Johns Manville.

4. Owens-Corning.

5. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:

1. Aeroflex. Aerocell.

2. Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.

3. Nomaco. K-flex.

4. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.02 PIPE INSULATION

A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F (0.034 at 24 degrees C).

2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F (minus 18 to 454 degrees C).

3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints.

4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F (minus 29 to 66 degrees C).

B. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.039 at 25 degrees C).

2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F (minus 57 to 82 degrees C).

2.03 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

C. Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.

D. Piping 2 inches (50 mm) diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.



E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum jacket single piece construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.

C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:

1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.

3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F (60 degrees C):

1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.

E. Inserts and Shields:

1. Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation.

2. Piping 2 inches (50 mm) Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket.

a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.

b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service.

3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts.

F. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:

1. Push insulation on to piping.

2. Miter joints at elbows.

3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.

4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.



5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 10 feet (3 meters) above finished floor: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.

H. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:

PIPING SYSTEM

INSULATION

TYPE PIPE SIZE

INSULATION

THICKNESS

inches (mm)

Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation

P-1 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) and smaller

0.5 (13)

Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation

P-1 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) and larger

1.0 (25)

Domestic Cold Water P-1 or P-5 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) and smaller

0.5 (13)

Domestic Cold Water P-1 or P-5 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) and larger

1.0 (25)

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 11 00 - 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 22 11 00

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet (1500 mm) of building.

2. Domestic water piping, above grade.

3. Unions and flanges.

4. Valves.

5. Pipe hangers and supports.

6. Pressure gages.

7. Pressure gage taps.

8. Thermometers.

9. Water pressure reducing valves.

10. Relief valves.

11. Strainers.

12. Hose bibs.

13. Backflow preventers.

14. Water hammer arrestors.

15. Thermostatic mixing valves.


1. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this section.

2. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

3. Section 22 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment: Product requirements for motors for placement by this section.

4. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section.

5. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section.

6. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification and valve tags for placement by this section.

7. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation.

8. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.



3. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

4. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.

C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering:

1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.

2. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

3. ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.

4. ASSE 5013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers (RP) and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers (RFP).

D. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

2. ASTM A234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

4. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.

5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

6. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

7. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

8. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.

9. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

E. American Welding Society:

1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

F. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

2. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

G. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

4. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

H. National Sanitary Foundation:

1. NSF/ANSI 61; Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components

I. Plumbing and Drainage Institute:

1. PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's catalog information.



2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service.

3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity.

4. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

5. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories.




B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended maintenance intervals.


A. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61.

B. Perform Work in accordance with The State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS






A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.



1.11 WARRANTY






B. Furnish two packing kits for each size valve, two loose keys for outside hose bibs.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING AND UNDER BUILDING SLAB

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C150 and AWWA C151.

1. Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153; ductile iron, 350 psi working pressure, standard thickness.

2. Push-on Joints: AWWA C111; 350 psi working pressure rubber gasket.

3. Restrained Joints: AWWA C111; 350 psi working pressure rubber gasket with threaded rods and bolts.

4. Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2.; Carbon steel hex bolts and nuts

5. Jackets (Non-Corrosive Soils): AWWA C151 1 mill asphaltic coating or AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket.

6. Jackets (Corrosive Soils): EN 545/ISO 2531; 1 mil zinc welded to exterior, 3 mil blue epoxy coating over zinc surface.

2.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5 tin-antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin-silver, lead free solder.

2.03 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches (50 mm) and Smaller:

1. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered or brazed joints.

2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and Larger:

1. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.



2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

2.04 VALVES – DOMESTIC WATER

A. Valves: Valve ends may either be threaded or soldered, but mixtures of end types in a system is not acceptable

2.05 BALL VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Apollo Valve Co

2. Nibco.

3. Stockham

B. Ball Valve (4-inch and smaller): MSS SP-110, ANSI/NSF 61-8; Blowout proof stem, 600 PSI CWP maximum pressure, 500°F maximum temperature, chrome plated ball, adjustable packing gland, in-line disassembly design, stem extensions, bronze body and trim, PTFE Seat, lead free, lead free hang tag, zinc plated steel lever handle with vinyl grip, threaded ends; 70LF-100-03.

C. Ball Valve (4-inch and smaller): MSS SP-110, ANSI/NSF 61-8; Blowout proof stem, 600 PSI CWP maximum pressure, 500°F maximum temperature, chrome plated ball, adjustable packing gland, in-line disassembly design, stem extensions, bronze body and trim, PTFE Seat, lead free, lead free hang tag, zinc plated steel lever handle and nut and vinyl grip, solder ends; 70LF-200-03.

2.06 HORIZONTAL SWING CHECK VALVES


1. Apollo Valve Co.

2. Nibco.

3. Stockham

B. Swing Check Valves (3 in and smaller): MSS SP-80, ASME B1.20.1; 200 PSI CWP at 100°F, solid bronze body and cap, horizontal swing, bronze seat, Y-Pattern, renewable seat disc, stainless steel Hinge Pin, solder or threaded ends; Model 161T or Model 161S.

C. Check Valves (4 in. and Larger): MSS SP 71, Swing check Class 125, cast iron body, bolted bonnet and cast iron disc, full port, brass and bronze internal parts (seat, disc, hinge pin), steel bolts, flanged ends; Model 910F

2.07 BALANCING VALVE


1. ITT Bell & Gossett; Circuit Setter Plus, Model CB

2. Taco Inc.

3. Watt Water Technologies

B. Calibrated Balancing Valve (1/2-inch through 2-inch): Precisely calibrated pre-settable balance valve, variable orifice flow meter and positive shut-off service valve, calibrated nameplate and memory stop indicator, capped readout valves with internal check valves, 1/4" NPT tapped and plugged drain port.

1. ANSI/NSF-61 Annex G; Lead-Free, brass body, 304 stainless steel ball, brass with EPT check valve readout valves, EPDM “O” ring, glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings, 400 psig at 250 degree design pressure and temperature.

2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE


1. Apollo Valve Co.; Model PRH-T-[F]-Y-[H]-LF

2. Wilkins Regulators.



3. Watts Regulator Co.

B. 2 inches and smaller: ASSE 1003, Bronze body, sealed spring cage, internal thermal expansion by-pass, stainless steel bolts and spring, in-line strainer, 400 psi maximum inlet pressure, spring range from 25 to 75 psig. [75-125 psig.], maximum temperature of 180 degrees, FDA approved EPDM with polyester diaphragm, FDA approved EPDM seat disc, up to 400 gpm, threaded [flanged] ends.

2.09 PRESSURE GAGES


1. H. O. Trerice; Model No. 500X

2. Marsh Instrument.

3. Taylor Instrument.

B. Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.1, 4 ½-inch diameter dial with cast aluminum case, stainless steel friction type ring and glass window. 300 stainless steel rotary type movement with stainless steel bushing.

1. Scale in black figures on white background. Scale shall indicate zero to 1-1/2 times the working pressure in the system in which gauge is installed, front calibration adjustment, mid-scale accuracy +/- 1%, both psi and kPa scales.

2. Needle Valve: Brass body, seat and stem, Teflon packing and brass handle, 2000 PSI operating pressure and 300 F. maximum operating temperature; Type FFG- No. 735.

3. Pressure Snubber: install to prevent radical fluctuation of movement, bronze body and core ¼-inch NPT.; No. 872.

2.10 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS


1. H. O. Trerice; Model No. BX9

2. Marsh Instrument.

3. Taylor Instrument.

B. Thermometers: Adjustable angle type, front blue appearing mercury tube type in 9 inch cast aluminum case with powder coating and one piece clear acrylic front window and separable brass thermowell.

1. Scale in black figures on white background. Scale graduated so as to show system design point temperature at midpoint of scale, 2% accuracy.

2. Where insulation thickness exceeds 2-inches a longer stem shall be used with an extension neck brass separable thermowell, minimum 2-inch long extension neck.

2.11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES


1. Watt Water Technologies; Model LF100XL

2. Apollo Valves

B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: ANSI Z21.22 certified, ASME certified and labeled; Lead-Free copper alloy body, NPT male inlet and female outlet connections, test lever, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, 75 to 150 psi pressure relief range, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F (98.9 degrees C).

2.12 STRAINERS


1. Apollo Valve Co.; Series 59LF000-20 or 59LF300-20

2. Spirax/Sarco.

3. Nibco



B. Strainers (4 in and smaller): AB 1952 Certified; 400 PSI CWP at 150°F., in-line design, solid bronze body and cap, Teflon O-ring, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, lead-free, solder or threaded ends.

2.13 HOSE BIBS


1. Woodford Mfg. Co.

B. Interior: Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with lock shield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011.

2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS – REDUCED PRESSURE


1. Watts Regulator Company

2. Zurn-Wilkins.

3. Apollo Valves

B. Backflow Preventer - Reduced Pressure Principle (1/4 through 2-inch): ASSE 1013; internal pressure differential relief valve located between two positive seating check modules with captured springs and silicone discs, replaceable seats and discs, single access cover with stainless steel bolts, stainless steel relief valve seat, Lead-Free bronze body and quarter turn ball shut-off valves, two resilient isolation valves, four resilient seated test cocks and air gap. Unit suitable for continuous pressure use of 175 psi and operating temperatures up to 140 degrees F., cast iron air gap; Model No. LF009QT.

C. Backflow Preventer - Reduced Pressure Principle (2 ½ to 3-inch): ASSE 1013; internal pressure differential relief valve located between two positive seating check modules with captured springs and silicone discs, replaceable seats and discs, single access cover with stainless steel bolts, four lead-free resilient seated test cocks. FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron body with plastic seats, non-rising stem resilient seated gate valves. Unit suitable for continuous pressure use of 175 psi and operating temperatures up to 140 degrees F., cast iron air gap; Model No. LF009NRS.

2.15 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS


1. Sioux Chief; Hydra-Rester/Mini-Rester Series

B. Water Hammer Arrester: ANSI/ASSE 1010; Lead-Free construction, piston type or bellows design, Type L copper tube, poly piston with EDPM “O” rings, threaded end, FDA approved piston lubricant.

2.16 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

2.17 MIXING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Leonard Valve Company; Series 34HL-105-01

2. Apollo Valves

3. Watts Regulators

B. Thermostatic Mixing Valve (Point of Use Single Valve): (1/2” inlets and outlet), ASSE 1017/ASSE 1070; 0.5 – 8 gpm flow, 125 psi maximum pressure, 200°F maximum water temperature, lead-free bronze body with rough bronze finish, tamper resistant adjustment cap, copper encapsulated thermostat assembly, stainless steel springs, temperature limit stop, integral check valves on inlets and outlet, mounting bracket, factory assembled and tested; Model 270-LF-BRKT.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

3.03 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAGES

A. Install one pressure gage for each pump.

B. Locate taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump.

C. Install gage taps in piping.

D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve to isolate each gage.

E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation.

F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.04 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with Section 22 05 29.

3.05 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 21 05 16.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 00.

H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 13.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

L. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 22 05 29.

N. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.



P. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

Q. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

R. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

S. Provide flow controls in water circulating systems as indicated on Drawings.

T. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; janitor rooms, flush valves and hose bibs.

U. Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

V. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013.

W. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to shower control valves and flush valves.

3.06 INSTALLATION - PUMPS

A. Install pumps on vibration isolators.

B. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve on pump discharge.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with AACO Standards.

C. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

D. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

E. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

F. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

G. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

H. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

I. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

J. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 13 00 - 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

SECTION 22 13 00 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet (1500 mm) of building. 2. Sanitary sewer piping above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Floor grates. 5. Cleanouts. 6. Bedding and cover materials.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for

painting specified by this section. 2. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment:

Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section.

3. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section.

4. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation.

1.02 REFERENCES

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. 2. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM A234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel

and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 5. ASTM A395 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining

Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 6. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings.

E. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: 1. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for

Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.



2. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

F. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

G. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sewage-ejectors, and manholes.

H. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit

manufacturers catalog information. 2. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,

component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

I. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

J. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


K. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

L. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

M. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.


N. Perform Work in accordance with The State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.

O. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

P. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

Q. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.


R. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.


S. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.



T. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.


U. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

V. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.


W. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.011 WARRANTY

X. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.


Y. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, bell and spigot ends. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene

gaskets or lead and oakum.

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub-less. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield

assemblies.

2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices or lead and oakum.

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub-less, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield

assemblies.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, galvanized. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.4 Cast Iron, threaded fittings. 2. Fittings: ASTM A47, Malleable Iron, ASME B16.3, threaded type. 3. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller.



2.03 FLOOR GRATES

A. Floor Grate: ASME A112.21.1; Match existing drain conform to Zurn Model Model Z1000.

2.04 PIPE TRAPS:

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Model Z1000 2. Josam Manufacturing Co. 3. Jay R. Smith Co

B. Pipe Traps: Deep seal, coated cast iron body with bronze cleanout plug.

2.05 CLEANOUTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers (Cleanouts): 1. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2. Josam Manufacturing CO. 3. Jay R. Smith

B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Heavy duty, adjustable, coated cast iron body with gas and watertight bronze tapered threaded plug, round scoriated cast iron secured top; Model Z-1400-HD-BP.

C. Interior Finish floor Areas: Heavy duty, adjustable, coated cast iron body with gas and watertight bronze tapered threaded plug, round scoriated cast iron secured top, carpet marker; Model Z-1400-HD-CM.

D. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Floor cleanout, heavy duty, adjustable, coated cast iron body with gas and watertight bronze tapered threaded plug, square top recessed for tile or vinyl; Model Z-1400-HD-TX.

E. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Wall cleanout with smooth stainless steel access cover with securing screw, coated cast iron body, bas and watertight ABS tapered threaded plug; Model Z-1441.

F. Cleanout Tee: Coated cast iron body with gas and watertight bronze tapered threaded plug round stainless steel wall access cover with securing screw and round scoriated nickel bronze floor access cover and frame; Model Z-1445 and 1448.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.



B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.03 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping.

C. Establish minimum separation of 12” from other services piping in accordance with plumbing code.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

3.04 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage one percent minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.

H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 21 05 16.

J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 22 07 00.

K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 13.

L. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.



N. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

P. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

Q. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 07 84 00 22 05 29.

R. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 33 00 - 1

Electric Domestic Water Heaters

SECTION 22 33 00

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial electric water heaters.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section: 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to domestic

water heaters. 2. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for

electric connections specified by this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential

Buildings.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME PTC 25 - Pressure Relief Devices. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: As specified in Section 01300; submittals required for the following items: 1. Water Heaters 2. Expansion Tank 3. Hot Water Storage Tanks




A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County .

B. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Accept water heaters on site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage.


60654 / AACDPW 22 33 00 - 2


B. Protect tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.



1.09 WARRANTY


B. Furnish ten year Non Pro-rated tank warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 POTABLE WATER EXPANSION TANK

A. Acceptable Manufacturers : 1. Amtrol; Model ST. 2. Watts Water Technologies 3. Or Approved Equal.

B. Construction: Welded steel outer shell, rigid polypropylene liner mechanically bonded, butyl rubber diaphragm, pre-charged air chamber.

C. Accessories: Stainless steel system connection and air-charging fitting.

2.02 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. The entire unit is to be complete with all operating controls and require only plumbing and electrical service connections. The tank shall be all welded steel commercial construction designed for 150 psi working pressure and contain 80 gallons of storage.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. A.O. Smith 2. State 3. Or Approved Equal.

C. Water Heater: Electric, vertical storage tank, UL listed, 150 psi working pressure; Model DEL-30.

1. Tank: Glass lined steel tank, inlet and outlet fittings, ASME temperature/pressure relief valve, electrical connection, drain and valves,

2. Jacket and Insulation: Steel jacket with baked enamel finish, foam insulation of thickness to meet ASHRAE 90.1, hinged control compartment access door.

3. Elements: Single, zinc plated copper sheaths, medium watt density. 4. Controls: Dual thermostats, high/low arrangement wired for non-simultaneous operation,

terminal block, manual reset high temperature, high temperature cut-off switch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heater.


60654 / AACDPW 22 33 00 - 3


B. Provide hangers and platform to support water heater.

C. Connect domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping to supply and return water heater connections.

D. Provide and install shut-off valves and dielectric heat traps on the water inlet and outlet lines.

E. Provide and install thermometer on hot water supply line (hot water.)

F. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest drain.

G. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting.

H. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

I. Install control wiring between water heater control panel and field mounted control devices.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 1

PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets. 2. Urinals. 3. Lavatories. 4. Showers. 5. Mop sinks.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Product requirements for calking between

fixtures and building components for placement by this section. 2. Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to plumbing

fixtures. 3. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Waste connections to plumbing

fixtures. 4. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections:.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.6.1 - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for

Public Use. 2. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 3. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 4. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for plumbing fixtures.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures.


1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements. 1. Water Efficiency Certificates:

a. Certify plumbing fixture flow rates.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 2

PLUMBING FIXTURES


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit literature, manufacturer’s maintenance instructions and parts list.



B. Provide plumbing fixture fittings in accordance with ASME A112.18.1 that prevent backflow from fixture into water distribution system.

C. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS



1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING



A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

1.010 WARRANTY




B. Furnish two sets of faucet cartridges, flush valve service kits, and lavatory supply fittings.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 3

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER’S – WATER CLOSETS

A. Wall Mounted Bowl Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Plumbing Model Afwall FloWise™ 3351.128. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Toto Inc. 4. Zurn Industries. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Wall Mounted Bowl Manufacturers (Physically Disabled): 1. American Standard Plumbing Model Afwall FloWise™ 3351.128. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Toto Inc. 4. Zurn Industries. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Floor Mounted Bowl Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Plumbing Model Colorado ELO NGATED ™ 3543.001US. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Toto Inc. 4. Zurn Industries. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Floor Mounted Bowl Manufacturers (Physically Disabled): 1. American Standard Plumbing Model Colorado RIGHT HEIGHT ™ 3541.001US. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Toto Inc. 4. Zurn Industries. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

E. Flush Valve Manufacturers (Water Closet): 1. American Standard Plumbing Model SELECTRONIC FloWise™ 6065.121.002. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Zurn Industries. 4. Toto Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Seat Manufacturers: 1. American Standard Plumbing Model 5901.100. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Zurn Industries. 4. Church 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

G. Carrier Manufacturers 1. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Model Z-1203-N or Z-1203-H 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 4

PLUMBING FIXTURES

2.02 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS – WALL MOUNTED (P-1)

A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; 1.28 GPF, high efficiency, wall mounted, elongated, vitreous china, siphon jet action, 1 1/2-inch top spud.

B. Seat: White hydraulically compressed plastic, elongated open front less cover, self-sustaining, with stainless steel hinge posts and concealed check.

C. Sensor Flush Valves: ASME A112.19.2; Exposed, chrome plated brass, piston or diaphragm type, battery powered, infrared automatic flush sensor, manual over-ride button, 3-second flush delay, automatic flush after 24 hours of non use, 1-inch IPS screwdriver angle stop, with protective chrome-plated metal cover, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1 1/2-inch top spud, wall and spud flanges, 6-volt lithium battery or equivalent, “low battery” flashing LED, infrared sensor range adjustment screw, 1.28 gallons per flush.

D. Carrier: Coated cast iron, horizontal, no-hub or hub and spigot connection, designed for right-hand, left-hand, or double main fitting with 2-inch vent; adjustable, gasketed face plate, universal floor mounted foot supports, corrosion resistant adjustable ABS coupling with integral test cap, fixture bolts, trim and stud protectors, rear anchor tie-down and bonded gasket.

2.03 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS –WALL MOUNTED (P-1A)

A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1-08; Physically Disabled; 1.28 GPF, high efficiency, wall mounted, elongated, vitreous china, siphon jet action, 1 1/2-inch top spud.



D. Carrier: Coated cast iron, horizontal, no-hub or hub and spigot connection, designed for right-hand, left-hand, or double main fitting with 2-inch vent; adjustable, gasketed face plate, universal floor mounted foot supports, corrosion resistant adjustable ABS coupling with integral test cap, fixture bolts, trim and stud protectors, rear anchor tie-down and bonded gasket.

2.04 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS – FLOOR MOUNTED (P-1B)

A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; 1.28 GPF, high efficiency, wall mounted, elongated, vitreous china, siphon jet action, 1 1/2-inch top spud.



60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 5

PLUMBING FIXTURES


2.05 MANUFACTURER’S – URINALS

A. Urinal System: 1. American Standard Plumbing; Model Washbrook FloWise™ 6590.525. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Toto Inc. 4. Zurn Industries, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Urinal Carrier 1. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Model Z-1222 2. Josam. 3. J.R. Smith. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.06 URINALS (P-2)

A. Urinal: ASME A112.19.2; 0.125 GPF, high efficiency, vitreous china, wall hung washout flush, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud, 2" threaded outlet connection, steel supporting hanger.

B. Sensor Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed, chrome plated, piston or diaphragm type, battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button, 3/4" screwdriver stop, adjustable tailpiece, 3/4" top spud, wall and spud flanges and escutcheons, flushes on 0.125 gallons.

C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs.

2.07 URINALS (P-2A)

A. Urinal: ASME A112.19.2; Physically Disabled; 0.125 GPF, high efficiency, vitreous china, wall hung washout flush, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud, 2" threaded outlet connection, steel supporting hanger.

B. Sensor Flush Valve: ASME A112.18.1; exposed, chrome plated, piston or diaphragm type, battery operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button, 3/4" screwdriver stop, adjustable tailpiece, 3/4" top spud, wall and spud flanges and escutcheons, flushes on 0.125 gallons.

C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs.

2.08 MANUFACTURER’S – COUNTERTOP MOUNTED LAVATORY (P-3)

A. Lavatory: Sink included in Countertop.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 6

PLUMBING FIXTURES

B. Faucet: 1. Chicago, Faucet Co.; Model 116.956.AB.1. 2. American Standard Plumbing. 3. Kohler Co. 4. Sloan Co. 5. Toto Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc. 7. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Trim: 1. McGuire Manufacturing. 2. Keeney Manufacturing 3. T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Trim Insulation Package: 1. Tru-Bro, Inc.; Model Z-1231 2. Pro-Wrap 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.09 COUNTERTOP MOUNTED LAVATORY (P-3)

A. Bowl: See Architectural Division.

B. Sensor Faucet: Battery powered, chrome-plated brass construction, infrared proximity sensor, circuit control module, sensor range adjustment screw, variable time-out settings, low battery LED indicator light, integrated strainer, water resistant solenoid enclosure, solenoid valve, chrome plated grid strainer with 1 1/4-inch outlet tube, metal jacket wire protection for sensor leads, two back checks for hot and cold supplies, Lithium batteries, 0.5 gpm flow with vandal resistant aerator. 1. Mixing Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve. 2. Stainless steel flexible hose with 3/8” compression connection, 15” length.

C. Trim: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon;

Model 8088. 2. Chrome plated, wheel handle, 3/8 inch angle valve.

2.010 MANUFACTURER’S – WALL MOUNTED LAVATORY(P-3A)

A. Lavatory: 1. American Standard Plumbing; Model 0355.012 Lucerne. 2. Kohler Co. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Faucet: 1. Chicago, Faucet Co.; Model 116.956.AB.1. 2. American Standard Plumbing. 3. Kohler Co. 4. Sloan Co. 5. Toto Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 7

PLUMBING FIXTURES


C. Trim: 1. McGuire Manufacturing. 2. Keeney Manufacturing 3. T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Carrier: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Model Z-1231 2. Josam Mfg. 3. J. R. Smith 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Trim Insulation Package: 1. Tru-Bro, Inc.; Model Z-1231 2. Pro-Wrap 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.011 WALL MOUNTED LAVATORY (P-3A)

A. Bowl: Wall-hung sink of vitreous china, with front overflow, D-shaped bowl, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields and faucet ledge. Coordinate with wall hanger and faucet mounting.

B. Faucet: Centerset lavatory faucet on 4" centers. 1/4 turn washerless ceramic disc valve cartridges. Durable cast brass waterways with one-half inch male inlet shanks. Metal body. Color matched underbody. Metal lever handles. 1. Stainless steel flexible hose with 3/8” compression connection, 15” length.

C. Trim: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon;


2.012 MANUFACTURER’S – COUNTERTOP MOUNTED LAVATORY (P-3B)

A. Lavatory: Sink included in Countertop, See Architectural Division.

A. Faucet: 1. Chicago, Faucet Co.; Model 116.956.AB.1. 2. American Standard Plumbing. 3. Kohler Co. 4. Sloan Co. 5. Toto Inc. 6. Zurn Industries, Inc. 7. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Trim: 1. McGuire Manufacturing. 2. Keeney Manufacturing 3. T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 8

PLUMBING FIXTURES

C. Trim Insulation Package: 1. Tru-Bro, Inc.; Model Z-1231 2. Pro-Wrap 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.013 WALL MOUNTED LAVATORY (P-3B)

A. Bowl: See Architectural Division.

A. Sensor Faucet: Battery powered, chrome-plated brass construction, infrared proximity sensor, circuit control module, sensor range adjustment screw, variable time-out settings, low battery LED indicator light, integrated strainer, water resistant solenoid enclosure, solenoid valve, chrome plated grid strainer with 1 1/4-inch outlet tube, metal jacket wire protection for sensor leads, two back checks for hot and cold supplies, Lithium batteries, 0.5 gpm flow with vandal resistant aerator. 1. Mixing Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve. 2. Stainless steel flexible hose with 3/8” compression connection, 15” length.

B. Trim: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon;


2.014 MANUFACTURERS - MOP SERVICE BASIN (P-4)

A. Mop Service Basin: 1. Fiat products, Inc.; Model MSB-2424 2. Chicago, Faucet Co 3. Stern-Williams 4. Mustee

B. Faucet: 1. Fiat products, Inc.; Model 830-AA 2. Stern-Williams 3. Mustee

C. Trim: 1. Fiat products, Inc.; Model E-77-AA, No. 832-AA, No. 889-CC 2. Stern-Williams 3. Mustee

2.015 MOP SERVICE BASIN (P-4)

A. Floor mounted molded stone and resin one piece homogeneous unit, 24 x 24 x 10 inch size, with cadmium plated brass drain body and stainless steel combination dome strainer.

B. Service Faucet: Chrome-plated with vacuum breaker, integral stops, wall brace, pail hook and 3/4" hose thread on spout, four arm handles, body inlets, 8" centers.

C. Trim: Vinyl Bumper Guard, 30 inch of 5/8 inch diameter rubber hose, stainless steel hose clamp, stainless steel mop hanger.


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 9

PLUMBING FIXTURES

2.016 MANUFACTURERS – SHOWER (P-5)

A. Shower Valve: 1. American Standard. Model FloWise 1662.211.002. 2. Leonard Valve Company. 3. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Kohler Co. 5. Chicago, Faucet Co

2.017 SHOWER (P-5)

A. Enclosure and Basin specifications in Architectural Division.

B. Shower system shall feature a wall supply with 1/2" NPT female inlets and 1/2" NPSM male outlet, 59" metal hose, vacuum breaker, 1.5 gpm/5.7L/min. 3-function water saving personal hower and a 36" Slide Bar. Pressure Balance valve shall feature a cast brass body. Shall feature ceramic disc valve cartridge which controls water temperature and volume. Shall also feature hot limit safety stop.

C. Hand shower shall include a non-positive shut-off to be ADA compliant. Shall also include a permanent built-in pressure compensating control device to provide consistent flow over a wide pressure range. A check valve to prevent back flow. Fitting shall be American Standard Model # 1660.76

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

D. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connection in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture schedule for each particular fixture

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with the State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.

B. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

C. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

D. Install components level and plumb.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456825581&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456825584&mf=04&src=wd


60654 / AACDPW 22 40 00 - 10

PLUMBING FIXTURES

E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports or wall carriers and bolts.

F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00, color to match fixture.

G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.

H. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall.

I. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.05 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED FIXTURES

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance.


A. Finished Plumbing Test: 1. After fixtures are set and their traps filled with water perform final test on plumbing

system for gas and water tightness. 2. After filling all traps with water introduce a pungent, thick smoke into system until

smoke exits roof vents, then plug vents and pressurize system equivalent to a one inch water column and maintain pressure until system inspection is completed.

3. Where smoke test is not allowed a peppermint test may be substituted. After filling all traps place 2 ounces of oil of peppermint into roof vents followed immediately by 10 quarts of hot (160 degree) water and seal roof vents. Exclude persons having come in contact with peppermint from test area. A positive test (leakage) is detection of peppermint odor at any point in the system.

4. When permitted by Engineer, or where code prohibits above test method, test system for gas and water-tightness by plugging roof vents and building drain, filling traps with water, and introducing air pressure into the system equivalent to one inch water column. Maintain pressure without introduction of additional air until system inspection is completed

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 23 31 00 - 1 HVAC DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 23 31 00

HVAC DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Duct materials.

2. Ductwork fabrication.

3. Grilles.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer information for duct materials, duct connectors.

B. Product Data: Sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.


A. Project Record Documents:

1. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.


A. Perform Work according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.

B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

C. Perform Work according to State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.


A. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

B. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.06 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Minimum Conditions: Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Subsequent Conditions: Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.

1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTS

A. Performance and Design Criteria:

1. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission of Owner and the Architect/Engineer.

B. Galvanized-Steel Ducts:

1. Material: ASTM A653 (A653M) galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Quality: Lock forming.

3. Finish: G90 (Z180) zinc coating according to ASTM A90 (A90M).



C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

D. Hanger Rod:

1. Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Comply with ASTM A36 (A36M).

3. Type: Threaded both ends.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Rectangular Ducts:

1. According to SMACNA 1966.

2. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for indicated operating pressures.

B. Tees, Bends, and Elbows:

1. Minimum Radius:

a. 2.5 times centerline duct width.

b. If not possible or if rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes.

C. Takeoffs:

1. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs.

2. If not possible due to space limitations, provide 90-degree conical tee connections.

D. Sealing:

1. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.

2. Sealants, Mastics, and Tapes: Comply with UL 181A and provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

2. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

3. Strap and Rod Sizes:

a. Comply with SMACNA 1966.

b. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Ducts: Comply with SMACNA 1884.

4. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

a. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

b. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

c. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel, coated with zinc chromate.

2.04 GRILLES

A. Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hart and Cooley

2. Aerovent.

3. Titus.

4. Price.

5. Carnes.

6. Kruger.



7. Or Approved Equal Permitted.

B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face matching Titus 350-RL.

C. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) margin with countersunk screw mounting.

D. Fabrication: Aluminum with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frame, with factory clear lacquer finish, color to be selected.

E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

F. See Design Documents for sizes capacities and additional requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.

B. Verify inlet and outlet locations.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation at beginning of installation.

B. Install temporary closures of metal or taped PE on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. According to SMACNA 1966.

B. Hanger and Supports:

1. Fabricate and support ducts according to SMACNA 1884 and 1966.

2. Threaded Rods: Provide double nuts and lock washers.

3. Building Attachments:

a. Provide concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

b. If possible, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

c. Powder-Actuated Concrete Fasteners:

1) Use only for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

2) Install after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3) Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

4. Hanger Spacing:

a. Comply with SMACNA 1966.

b. Install hangers and supports within 6 inches (150 mm) of each elbow and within 6 inches (150 m) of each branch intersection.

c. Extend strap supports down both sides of ducts and turn under bottom at least 2 inch (50 mm).

d. Secure hanger to sides and bottom of ducts with sheet metal screws.

5. Hangers Exposed to View: Provide threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

6. Vertical Ducts:

a. Support with steel angles or channel secured to sides of duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets.

7. Upper Attachments:

a. Attach to structures.



b. Selection and Sizing: Provide pullout, tension, and shear capacities as required for supported loads and building materials.

8. Penetrations:

a. Avoid penetrations of ducts with hanger rods.

b. If unavoidable, provide airtight rubber grommets at penetrations.

C. Install grilles to ductwork with airtight connection.

D. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to grilles whether or not dampers are furnished as part of grille assembly.

3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to clearances and obstructions, piping, equipment and lighting arrangement.


A. Duct to be designed for 1-Inch wg (250 Pa) above Ambient Pressure:

1. Comply with SMACNA constructions standards and testing.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean duct system to remove accumulated dust.

B. Protect sensitive equipment with temporary covers during cleaning.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 23 82 00 - 3 CONVECTION HEATING UNITS

SECTION 23 82 00

CONVECTION HEATING WALLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Electric wall heaters.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit schedules for equipment and radiation enclosures indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output of equipment. Submit coil and frame configurations, and rough-in dimensions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists.


A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Maryland Anne Arundel County Standards.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Furnish manufacturer's warranty for wall heater motors for one year after Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS

A. Manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. QMark.

2. Markel Products.

3. Or Approved Equal Permitted.

B. Assembly: UL listed and labeled assembly with terminal box and cover, and controls.

C. HEATING ELEMENT: The heating element shall be of the non-glowing design consisting of a resistance wire enclosed in a steel sheath to which steel plate fins are copper brazed, warranted for 5 years.

D. FAN AND MOTOR: Fan shall be five-bladed aluminum. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed.

E. FAN DELAY SWITCH: Fan control shall be of bi-metallic, snap-action type and shall activate fan after heating element reaches operating temperature. The fan shall continue to operate after the thermostat is satisfied and until the heating element is cool.

F. THERMOSTAT: The tamper-proof thermostat shall be of the bi-metallic snap-action type with enclosed contacts concealed behind the front cover.

G. Thermal cutout: A manual-reset thermal cutout shall shut off the heater in the event of overheating.

H. Power on/off switch: A double-pole, single throw ON/OFF switch shall be mounted on the back box behind the front grille panel.

I. Back box: The back box shall for recessed rough-in box in either masonry or frame installations, and shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel and shall contain knockouts for power leads.


60654 / AACDPW 23 82 00 - 3 CONVECTION HEATING UNITS

J. Front panel: The front panel shall be of the bar grille type and shall be constructed of 16-gauge cold-rolled steel, welded into a uniform grille to direct the warmed air toward the floor. A decorative satin-finish aluminum “picture” frame shall surround the front grille.

K. Control: Separate fan speed switch and thermostat heat selector switch, thermal overload.

2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. 1500-Watts 277 volts single phase for Men’s and Women’s rooms, Qmark Model AWH4307F.

B. 500-Watts 120 volts single phase for ADA rooms, Qmark Model CWH1101DSAF.

C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount in equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify wall construction is ready for installation.

B. Verify concealed blocking and supports are in place and connections are correctly located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with State of Maryland and Anne Arundel County standards.

B. Install wall heaters recessed in wall.

C. Install wall heaters as indicated on Drawings

D. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not factory-mounted.

E. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 00-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for basic electrical materials, material handling, and other basic electrical

methods.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings. 2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports Systems for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 7. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems. 8. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. America National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ANSI/ASME Y14.2M, Line Conventions and Lettering. 2. ANSI/ASME Y14.24M, Types and Applications of Engineering Drawings. 3. ANSI/ASME Y14.34M, Associated Lists. 4. ANSI/ASME Y14.35M, Revision of Engineering Drawings and Associated Documents. 5. ANSI/ASME Y14.100, Engineering Drawing Practices.

C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA): 1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.

D. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 1. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. ANSI/NECA 100 Symbols for Electrical Construction Drawings.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

G. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval:



1. Product Data: a. Submit Product Data, including catalog cuts, for all products provided for the

electrical work of this Contract and as specified in other Sections. 1) Clearly indicate the specific products proposed for the project by use of arrow,

circle or underline. Indicate usage of each product on each submittal. 2. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit Shop Drawings for the electrical work of this Contract as specified in other Sections.

b. Certificates: 1) Testing agency quality verification that all products meet requirements or

manufacturer disclaimer statements. c. Qualification Statements:

1) Testing agency qualifications. 3. Closeout Submittals:

a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Agency Qualifications:

a. Use a NETA accredited testing agency, or approved equal, that is accredited for the region in which the Contract work is performed.

b. Submit the testing agency’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform all electrical work in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 70, the

National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications: 1. Submit evidence with all Product Data that the products represented meet testing agency

quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labeling requirements. a. Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a separate listing

card. b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not provide

evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an item does not have quality assurance verification. 1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are subject to

the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Deliver materials and equipment to the work site in accordance with the following: 1. Deliver materials and equipment in a clean condition.

a. Provide packaging that plugs, caps, or otherwise seals openings both during shipping and temporary storage.

2. Provide equipment needed for unloading operations, and have such equipment on the work site to perform unloading work when the material and equipment is delivered. a. If possible, clearly identify pick-points or lift-points on electrical equipment crating

and packaging. b. In the absence pick-points or lift-points on equipment crating and packaging, identify

pick-points or lift-points on the equipment itself.

B. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with the following: 1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.



2. When unloading materials and equipment, provide special lifting harnesses or apparatus as required by manufacturers.

C. Store electrical materials and equipment, whether on-site or off-site, in accordance with the following: 1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for storing the items. 2. Store electrical equipment and products under cover.

a. Except for electrical conduit, store electrical equipment and products in heated warehouses or enclosed buildings with auxiliary heat and that provide protection from the weather on all sides.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the Contract

requirements, and as follows: a. Organize Operation and Maintenance Manuals by Specification Section and

equipment number as designated on the Contract Drawings. b. Include suppliers, supplier addresses, and supplier telephone numbers for the

equipment and products furnished. 2. 60 days prior to the request for final payment, prepare and submit two copies of the

proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for approval. 3. Upon approval of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit six

corrected copies as follows: a. Submit one set to the Engineer. b. Place one set in the spare parts and fuse cabinet in the new electrical service

building c. Deliver the remaining four copies to the Owner.

4. Insert final record drawings in each set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at Project Closeout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Grounding and Bonding Materials: 1. Provide grounding and bonding materials in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 26.

B. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide hangers and supports for electrical equipment in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 28.

C. Electrical Identification Materials: 1. Provide electrical identification materials in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 53.

D. Wire and Cable: 1. Provide low-voltage electrical wire, cable, and accessories in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 19.

E. Conduit and Raceway: 1. Provide conduit and raceway as indicated, as appropriate for the application per NFPA

70, and in accordance with the following:



a. Conduit and Tubing: Provide electrical conduit and tubing in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13.

F. Wiring Devices: 1. Provide electrical wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 27

26.

2.02 SHOP FINISHING

A. For electrical equipment, factory-apply paint and coating systems that at a minimum meet the requirements of the NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field-Applied Finishes: 1. Except for factory-finished items that have been completely finished with factory-applied

primer and final finish coatings, finish installed electrical materials, equipment, apparatus, and items in the field in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00. a. Apply paint material matching the composition of the factory-applied products.

1) Obtain factory-supplied paint for this work whenever available. b. Comply with the paint manufacturer’s instructions for mixing, thinning, surface

preparation, application, spreading rate, drying time, and environmental limitations concerning application of the paint.

c. Apply paint in such a manner so that the finished appearance will match as nearly as possible the factory finish. 1) Poorly applied paint may be required to be repaired and re-applied by the

Contractor in accordance with Article 3.02 at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Coordinate the painting of large areas with the Engineer to minimize the duration of

exposure of other workers to toxic paint fumes.

3.02 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. If the factory finish of factory-finished items is damaged for any reason, refinish the item. 1. If an item that has several surfaces has damage on one surface, refinish the entire

damaged surface. a. Surface Preparation:

1) Outside the damaged area, lightly sand the entire surface and perform additional sanding to profile the damaged paint edge.

2) Prepare the surfaces of damaged areas in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.


A. Perform electrical testing as detailed in Section 26 05 63 and in each Specification Section.

B. Have electrical work inspected as required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. Submit a copy of the certification of inspection with the final project closeout documents,

and post the original in the electrical room on-site protected by a metal frame with a protective plate glass cover.

C. The quality of finishing and refinishing work is subject to approval by the Engineer.



END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 19-1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning, and

protecting low voltage cable, shielded cable, and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,

Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 1202 - Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cables.

C. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA WC 26/EEMAC 201 - Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 13 - Standard for Power-Limited Circuit Cables. 2. UL 1569 - Standard for Metal-Clad Cables. 3. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.


A. Conductors in Raceway and Conduit Systems: 1. Provide conduit systems for installing the wiring that is outside of equipment. 2. Except for raceway or conduit for control wires or where otherwise indicated on the

Contract Drawings, design raceway and conduit systems so that the maximum number of low-voltage current carrying conductors (per NFPA 70, Article 310) in each raceway or conduit does not exceed three, plus a ground.

B. Cable Tension Design Requirements: 1. Design conduit runs so that the tension limits set by the wire and cable manufacturers will

not be exceeded. a. Provide additional pulling points as required to limit the tension to acceptable levels.

C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts:



1. Submit low-voltage ground, power, and control wiring product data as listed below for the products provided as the Work of this Section; and clearly indicate the usage of each product on the data submitted. a. Wires and cables. b. Lugs. c. Connectors. d. Tapes. e. Pulling lubricant. f. Tools used to crimp connectors.

D. Use of Trade Names: 1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the basis

of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required. a. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose

products are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contract requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. Wires and cables. b. Lugs c. Connectors. d. Tape. e. Pulling lubricant.

2. Samples: a. Wire samples.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Design Data.

1) Tension cable pulling calculations for all underground power runs. b. Certificates.

1) Testing agency/quality verification. c. Manufacturer’s Instructions.

1) Cable manufacturer’s recommendations. d. Qualification Statements.

1) Documented experience of the installing firm. 2) Qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the Work.


A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications:

a. To install the Work of this Section, employ the services of a firm specializing in installing wire, cable, and accessories, and that has a minimum of 3 years experience doing so. 1) Submit the documented experience of the firm installing the wire, cable, and

accessories. b. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensed electricians.

1) Submit the qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the Work of this Section.

B. Regulatory Requirements:



1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in NFPA 70, and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.

C. Certifications: 1. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved by

Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products. a. Provide copper conductors listed and labeled by UL for all wiring.

2. Submit evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling for each product with the submitted product data either by providing a printed mark on the data or by attaching a separate listing card. a. For items without such evidence, submit a written statement from the product

manufacturer that indicates why it does not have quality assurance verification.

D. Field Samples: 1. Submit one 36-inch long sample of each type of wire to be used.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Imprint insulated conductors with the date of manufacture, the wire type, and the

manufacturer. 2. Package wire and cable in conformance with the requirements of

NEMA WC 26/EEMAC 201. 3. Protect items from damage during delivery, handling, and installation.

a. Comply with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for inspection, handling, storage, temperature conditioning, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installing cable.

b. Submit the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for inspection, handling, storage, temperature conditioning, bending and training limits, pulling limits, and calculation parameters for installing cable

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months before delivery to the Site is

unacceptable for use under this Contract, and will be rejected.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets. 2. Protect items from damage during storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS

A. Conductor Design Requirements: 1. Provide conductors of the proper size and ampacity ratings based on Article 310 of NFPA

70. a. Provide copper conductors that have 98 percent conductivity. b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, at a minimum provide

conductors of the following American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes: 1) For power and branch feeder circuits: 12 AWG.



a) For power and branch feeders, provide solid or stranded copper low-voltage conductors for sizes up to and including 10 AWG, provide stranded copper low-voltage conductors for 8 AWG and larger sizes.

2) For control circuits: 14 AWG. 3) For alarm and status circuits: 14 AWG.

B. Insulation Design Requirements: 1. Provide low voltage ground, power, and control wiring having the proper insulation types

as follows: a. For wiring that is wholly in dry indoor locations: Type XHHW-2, or dual-rated Type

THHN/THWN. b. For ground wires: THW may be used at the Contractor’s option.

2. Color Coding of Wires a. Insulation shall be factory colored per Tables 26 05 19-1, 26 05 19-2 and/or 26 05

19-3 below. The use of tape for color coding is prohibited.

C. Manufacturers 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Continental Wire & Cable Company b. SouthWire c. General Cable a. CME Wire & Cable Inc. b. Or Approved Equal

2.02 MATERIALS

A. 600 Volt Rated Multi-Conductor Cable: 1. Provide multi-conductor cable that is suitable for use indoors or outdoors; exposed or

concealed; as open wiring; in any raceway, underground duct, or cable tray; direct buried; or embedded in concrete. a. Provide cable that is UL listed as Type MC in compliance with the requirements of

UL 1569, and is UL listed for 90 degrees Celsius dry or wet, for direct burial, for cable tray use, and as sunlight resistant.

2. Assemble the cable with non-hygroscopic fillers and binder tape. a. Insulated Conductors:

1) Provide uncoated stranded copper conductors, complying with the requirements of ASTM B 8 for Class B conductors.

2) Provide cross-linked polyethylene type XHHW-2 insulation rated for 600 volts. b. Grounding Conductors:

1) Provide uninsulated copper conductors. c. Cover the overall assembly with a single strip of interlocked aluminum tape, and then

apply an outer final jacket of black flame-retardant PVC. 3. Manufacturers:

a. General Cable Technologies Corporation, b. The Okonite Company, c. Approved equal.

B. Metal Clad Cable: 1. Bare soft annealed copper conductors, solid or Class B stranded per ASTM B8.

Conductors shall be solid copper in sizes up to and including No. 10 AWG. For sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, conductors to be stranded copper.

2. Type THHN insulation, 600 volts, color coded. 3. Insulated green copper grounding conductor. Meets or exceeds requirements of NEC

Table 250-95. 4. Assembled per UL 1569 with non-hygroscopic fillers and binder tape.



5. Close fitting interlocked galvanized steel armor per UL 1569. 6. UL listed as type MC cable. 7. UL listed for cable tray use. 8. Cable shall be suitable for environmental air handling space installation. 9. Imprint insulated conductors with the date of manufacture, wire type, and manufacturer.

Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months before delivery to the job site shall not be used.

10. The only permitted use of Metal Clad cable is for final whip-connections to lighting fixtures above suspended ceilings. Length shall not exceed 72 inches.

11. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Or Approved Equal.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. CABLE PULLING LUBRICATION AND LUBRICANT: 1. Lubricant shall provide reduced tension on all types of cable jackets, dry to a thin

lubricating film that retains its lubricity for an extended period and won't cement in the cables.

2. The cable pulling lubricant shall produce a low coefficient of friction on a wide variety of cable jacket materials. The lubricant shall be UL listed. It shall be easy to handle and adhere well to the cable. Where appropriate, it shall also be tested and approved for use with CSPE (chlorosulfonated polyethylene) fire-retardant cable jackets where these materials are utilized.

3. The lubricant shall be UL or CSA Listed and Labeled and shall pass the IEEE 1210, Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable. It shall pass physical compatibility tests on LLDPE, XLPE, CPE, and PVC cable jacket or sheath materials. It shall not stress crack polyethylene per ASTM Standard 1693. There shall be no significant changes in the conductive properties of XLPE and EPR semi-conducting compounds when the lubricant's effect on volume resistivity is tested according to IEEE Standard 1210.

4. Lubricant to be specification-grade type that does not promote flame propagation when used with fire-retardant cables and systems, is harmless to humans, environmentally safe, and compatible with all common cable jacket materials

5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. The lubricant shall have less than a 6.0% solids residue after drying for 24 hours at 105°C.

6. Where CPE insulated wire and/or cable is rated for Low Smoke / Zero Halogen type, only Polywater Type LZ shall be utilized.

7. Specific lubricants for fiber-optic and other special cable installations shall be determined by the cable / lubricant manufaturers and the Contractor shall provide submittal information, including MSDS documentation and other information verifying suitability of products and general specification compliance as outlined herein.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. PolyWater - DynaBlue b. 3M - Type WL c. Greenlee - Type GEL

B. Grounding Braid: 1. Provide conformable, all-metal (tinned copper wires), corrosion resistant, woven

grounding braid having a high current-carrying capacity approximately that of 6 AWG wire, such as.

2. Manufacturers: a. 3M, Scotch, Scotch® 25 Electrical Grounding Braid, b. Plymouth c. Permacel



d. Approved equal.

C. Tapes: 1. Arc Proofing Tape:

a. Provide fire retardant arc proofing tape, such as Scotch® 77 Fire Retardant Electric Arc Proofing Tape, that is capable of protecting cables from fault arc generated heat and flames and of protecting adjacent wrapped cables and accessories exposed to fault arcs until limiting devices can interrupt the faulted circuit.

2. Vinyl Insulating Tape: a. Provide UL-listed flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) backed insulating tape with a

pressure sensitive adhesive, such as black Scotch® 33+ Vinyl Electrical Tape, that is resistant to abrasion, acids, alkalis, and copper corrosion; resistant to, hot, cold and wet weather; and resistant to damage from UV sunlight exposure.

3. Rubber Splicing Tape: a. Provide highly conformable, linerless, self-bonding, ethylene rubber (EPR), high-

voltage (through 69 kV) insulating tape formulated to provide excellent thermal dissipation of splice heat, and designed to insulate splices and terminate cables whose overload temperatures can reach 130 degrees Celsius, such as Scotch® 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape.

4. Manufacturers: a. 3M, Scotch b. Plymouth c. Permacel d. Approved equal.

D. Tubing: 1. Heat Shrinkable Tubing:

a. Provide flexible, flame retardant, polyolefin heat shrinkable thin wall tubing that has good resistance to common fluids and solvents, and has a high dielectric strength.

2. Waterproof Splice Kits: a. Provide heat shrinkable thin wall polyolefin electrical cable splice kits.

3. Manufacturers: a. Tyco Electronics, CGPT b. Thomas & Betts Corp. c. Approved equal.

E. Wire and Cable Connections: 1. Grounding Connectors:

a. Provide grounding connectors conforming to the requirements of Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Connectors for Service Wires and Cables, and for Wires and Cables Larger Than Number 6: a. Split Bolt Connectors or Compression Type Connectors:

1) Provide UL-listed split bolt connectors or compression type connectors for making parallel or butt splices of stranded copper wire.

2) Use companion preformed plastic insulating covers or tape insulation conforming to NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements.

b. Mechanical compression connectors: 1) Provide mechanical compression connectors that are capable of connecting

single or multiple conductors, and of being installed with one wrench. a) Type: Compact, two-hole mechanical compression connectors having two

clamping bolts. (1) Connector Body: Provide a high copper bronze or brass alloy body. (2) Bolts: Provide brass or bronze bolts; plated steel screws are

unacceptable.



(3) Fasteners: Provide silicon-bronze fasteners for bolting connectors to connections.

c. Crimped Compression Connectors: 1) Provide two-hole crimped compression type connectors fabricated from high

conductivity, seamless, electrolytic wrought copper, electrolytically tin-plated, and color coded to match the dies.

2) Provide crimped compression type connectors with adequate area to conduct the electrical current.

3) To crimp connectors, provide crimping tools from the same manufacturer that manufactured the connectors.

3. Connectors for Other Conductors: a. Any of the applicable types listed for larger wire may be provided. b. Screw Terminal Connections:

1) For making terminal connections of stranded copper wire to screw terminals, provide nylon insulated crimped compression terminals with copper barrel on the wire.

2) For making terminal connections of solid copper wire to screw terminals, provide screw lock connectors.

c. Wire Nuts: 1) For making splices of copper wire, provide pre-insulated, UL-listed, solderless

connectors of the spring-lock or compression type that can be installed by hand or using tools.

2) For site lighting, wire nuts used in underground or below grade locations is prohibited. There only permitted use for site lighting is within a pole base.

d. Manufacturers: 1) Thomas & Betts Corp. 2) Tyco Electronics, AMP Inc. 3) Ilsco Corp. 4) FCI-Burndy® Products 5) Approved equal.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: 1. 600 Volt Rated Multi-Conductor Cable:

a. 70,000 BTU/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test: 1) 600 Volt rated multi-conductor cable must pass the vertical tray flame test

requirements of UL 1569, IEEE 383, and IEEE 1202. b. 210,000 BTU/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test:

1) 600 Volt rated multi-conductor cable must pass the vertical tray flame test requirements of ICEA T-29-520.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults, and handholes to verify that they are clean, that they do not have burrs, that conduits are properly aligned, and that they are complete. 1. Ensure that on all conduits without threaded hubs, two locknuts are installed. 2. Ensure that in all conduits with wires larger than No. 10, bushings are installed.



3. Ensure that grounding bushings and fittings are installed at all places specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.

4. Verify that proper sized boxes are installed.

B. Verify that boxes and conduit fittings conform to the bending requirements specified in Article 314 of NFPA 70 (NEC).

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Verify that pulling calculations have been made and are available for long conduit runs and pulls as indicated in this Section.

B. Do not begin installing wiring until other work which might cause damage to the wires, cables, or conduits has been completed. 1. Correct deficiencies in conduits, junction boxes, electrical vaults, and handholes that have

been discovered by the inspection required in Paragraph 3.02.A.

C. Prepare conduits to receive wire and cable. 1. Swab the conduits with a nylon brush and steel mandrel. 2. Pre-lubricate the conduits for which the pulling tension calculations are based on a

coefficient of friction less than that of a dry conduit.

D. Verify that a means of controlling the pulling tension on the wire or cable is installed on the mechanical assist devices furnished for pulling cable.

E. Take the necessary precautions to prevent water, dirt, or other foreign material from accumulating in the conduits during the execution of wiring work.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Low Voltage Ground, Power, and Control Wiring: 1. Install Type CL2P, FPLP, or CMP cable as required by the application in accordance with

the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). a. For exposed low voltage wiring, use plenum cable. b. For low voltage wiring concealed from view, only install wiring in the accessible

locations permitted by the Contract Drawings. 2. Neutral Conductors:

a. For each single-phase and each multi-phase feeder, provide separate neutrals. b. For branch circuits, except at three-phase wye-connected panelboards, provide

separate neutral conductors. 1) For the three-phase wye-connected panelboards, provide common neutrals

from 3 adjacent single-pole circuit breakers or from the poles of the same multi-pole circuit breaker.

c. Except for feeders with a small unbalanced and single-phase load, size each neutral the same as the largest phase conductor. 1) For feeders with a small unbalanced and single-phase load, size the feeders to

the largest of the following: a) The size of any three-phase load connected to the neutral, which contains

lighting, computer power outlets, instrumentation, or other electric loads. b) The size required for 125 percent of the maximum unbalanced load.

3. Equipment Ground Conductors: a. Provide a green equipment ground conductor with all runs.

1) Provide the equipment ground conductor wire type as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.



B. Special Cable Installation Requirements: 1. In addition to the other installation requirements specified within this Section, comply with

the manufacturer’s installation instructions for bending, pulling, connector types, and grounding when installing armored variable frequency drive cable. a. Submit the manufacturer’s installation instructions for armored variable frequency

drive cable.

C. Pulling Cable: 1. Establish a feed-in point at the manhole, handhole, or building located at the highest

elevation of the run, and pull cables down grade using flexible cable feeds to convey the cables into the duct runs through the feed-in point opening. a. Furnish quadrant blocks located properly along the cable run. b. Limit cable pulling tensions to the maximum pulling tensions recommended by the

cable manufacturer. 1) Measure the cable pulling tension on all runs pulled with mechanical assistance

and for all cable runs where calculations are required to be submitted by using a dynameter.

2) Remove cables subjected to excessive bending and tension and that are cracked or have damaged or nicked outer jackets from the Site, and replace these cables with new undamaged cables. a) If pulling tension is exceeding during pulling, remove the affected cables

and mark them as not to be reused. c. Lubricate cables with lubricants during pulling.

D. Terminating Cable: 1. Terminate cable using materials and methods indicated or specified herein, or in

accordance with the written instructions of the cable manufacturer or termination kit manufacturer. a. For equipment connections, provide split bolt or compression type connectors,

mechanical compression connectors, or crimped compression type connectors as specified and approved by the equipment manufacturer; for all other types of connections provide connectors of one of the types specified:

2. Protect insulated power and lighting cable terminations from accidental contact, deterioration of coverings, and moisture by using proper terminating devices and materials.

E. Splicing Wire and Cable: 1. All new conductors shall be continuous from end to end without splices, except where

indicated on the drawings or with the special written permission of the Engineer on a case-by-case basis where the Contractor can demonstrate that installation without splices is not practical.

2. If permitted as noted above, splice cables in accessible locations. 3. Below-Grade Splices:

a. In underground systems, locate splices above the 100 year flood level. b. Make below-grade splices using a compression connector on the conductor. c. Insulate and waterproof below-grade splices by methods suitable for continuous

submersion in water using either of the methods that follow: 1) Gravity Pour Method:

a) Provide an approved commercial waterproof splice kit with the necessary materials and equipment, including a mold suitable for the cables to be spliced. (1) When the mold is in place around the joined conductors, prepare and

pour the resin mix into the mold. 2) Cast-Type Splice Insulation:

a) Provide an approved commercial waterproof splice kit with the necessary materials and equipment, including a thermosetting epoxy resin insulating



material applied by a gravity pour method or by a pressure injection method.

b) Fix cables in place until the splicing materials have completely set. 4. Within outlet or junction boxes, make wire and cable splices that conform to the

requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). a. Install these outlet or junction boxes in accessible locations.

F. Wiring Identification: 1. Color code all feeder wires and cables as indicated in Table 26 05 19-2.

Table 16122-1 Feeder Wire and Cable Color Coding

Phase 480Y/277 Volts 208Y/120 Volts A Brown Black B Orange Red C Yellow Blue

Neutral Gray or White with Yellow Tracer

White

Electrical Ground Conductor Green Green

2. Identify all power wiring by circuit and panelboard numbers. 3. Identify all control wiring with wire numbers. 4. Provide additional electrical identification of cabling and wiring as specified in Section 26

05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.


A. Site Tests: 1. Prior to energizing wire and cable, field test the wire and cable as specified in Section 26

05 63 Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 26-1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning, and protecting grounding and

bonding systems.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 4. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Public Works Association (APWA): 1. APWA Public Works Management Practices Manual.

B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 1; Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire. 2. ASTM B 3; Standard Specification for Soft-Drawn Copper Wire. 3. ASTM B 8; Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,

Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 4. ASTM C 653; Standard Guide for Determination of the Thermal Resistance of Low-

Density Blanket-Type Mineral Fiber Insulation. 5. ASTM D 5; Standard Test Method for Penetration of Bituminous Materials. 6. ASTM D 149; Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric

Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. 7. ASTM D 257; Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating

Materials. 8. ASTM D 570; Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA): 1. ANSI/NETA ETT Standard for Certification of Electrical Testing Technicians.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. National Electrical Manufacturing Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA TC-2; Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 2. NEMA TC-3; Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing. 3. NEMA TC-14; Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 4. NEMA WC-7; Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

F. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 467, Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 2. UL 486A-486B,Wire Connectors. 3. UL 486C, Standard for Splicing Wire Connections.



4. UL 486D, Standard for Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations.

5. UL 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.


A. Design the electrical system installation to conform to Article 300 of NFPA 70, Wiring Methods, and to other applicable articles of NFPA 70 governing methods of wiring.

B. Ground the conduit systems, metal enclosures, equipment frames, motors, and receptacles in accordance with Article 250 of NFPA 70, Grounding. 1. Ground all metallic conduits, wiring channels, and armored cables continuously from

outlet to outlet, and from outlets to cabinets, junction boxes, or pull boxes. a. Bond each run of raceways to form a continuous path for ground faults from end to

end. b. When liquid tight flexible metal conduit sizes larger than 1-inch or flexible metal

conduit are installed, provide external bond wires. 2. Grounding Bushings:

a. Provide all 1-inch or larger metallic conduits with grounding bushings unless they enter metallic enclosures via integral threaded hubs.

b. Provide grounding bushings for conduits entering the bottom of freestanding equipment.

c. Bond wire from every grounding bushing to the equipment ground stud or ground bus in the enclosure.

d. Bond the grounding bushings to ground studs or ground buses in the enclosures. 3. Provide insulated, internal equipment ground wire in all conduits.

a. Bond the internal wire to all pullboxes, junction boxes, equipment enclosures, and other enclosures as required by NFPA 70.

C. Equipment Grounds: 1. Design all feeders and branch circuits to include an equipment grounding conductor

consisting of a copper wire within a raceway or cable and sized as specified herein. a. Where conductors are run in parallel in multiple raceways, run the equipment

grounding conductor in parallel to the related conductors. b. Size each of the parallel equipment grounding conductors on the basis of the ampere

rating of the circuit overcurrent protecting device. 2. Ground enclosing cases, mounting frames, rack mounted components, rack struts,

switches, breakers, control panels, motors, and other electrical or electrically operated equipment by providing an equipment grounding conductor with phase conductors from an established equipment ground source.

D. Ground Wire Sizes: 1. The minimum size for bonding jumpers, equipment ground conductors, grounding

electrode conductors, and ground grid conductors is as follows: a. Under 600 volts:

1) Provide #12 AWG, minimum. 2) Control power circuits, Provide #14 AWG, minimum.

b. Over 600 volts: 1) For transformers, provide #2 AWG ground wire, minimum. 2) For motors, provide #4 AWG ground wire, minimum.

2. When the ground wire size is not specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide wire sized in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

E. Within 60 days of the Contract award, submit the following: 1. The Submittals required by Section 26 05 00.



a. Include Product Data and Catalog Cuts for all products provided, and describe the usage of each product.

2. Shop Drawings for the ground well grid installation in unpaved areas. 3. Shop Drawings for the ground well grid installation in paved areas. 4. Shop Drawings for the ground bus installation.

F. Project Record Documents: 1. Prepare and submit record drawings showing the actual installed elevations and locations

of grounding cables and rods for both concealed and exposed work provided under this Contract.

G. Project Closeout: 1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals that include the record drawings and all

Product Data in accordance with Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s product data 2. Shop Drawings:

a. Ground well grid installation in unpaved areas. b. Ground well grid installation in paved areas. c. Ground bus installation.

3. Quality Assurance/Quality Control Submittals: a. Certificates:

1) Testing agency product certification b. Qualification Statements:

1) System installers’ qualifications 2) Installation supervisors’ resumes

4. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals



a. Employ installers who specialize in the work of this Section, and who can demonstrate a minimum of three years documented experience.

b. Submit the system installers’ qualifications. 2. Supervisor’s Qualifications:

a. Employ supervisor to supervise the installation work who are skilled licensed electricians.

b. Submit the installation supervisors’ resumes. 3. All products are to be certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL),

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All grounding and bonding Work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70, the

National Electrical Code.

C. Certifications: 1. Testing Agency Product Certification:

a. Verify product quality by certifying products as meeting the requirements of one of the following: 1) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).



a) Provide products listed and labeled by UL. b. Testing agency product certification must include agency listing and labeling, either

by a printed mark on the data or by a separate listing card. 1) If an item does not have this quality assurance verification, provide a written

statement from the product manufacturer indicating why not; such manufacturer’s statements are subject to the approval of the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Transport materials, both on site and from Contractor's storage to site, in accordance with

the recommendations of the respective manufacturers.

B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials, both on and off site, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. 2. Store products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Conduit and Conduit Fittings: 1. For conduit and conduit fittings that enclose single ground wires without accompanying

circuit conductors provide one of the following: a. Schedule 80, non-metallic conduit and fittings conforming to the requirements of

Section 26 05 33.13 and the conduit additionally conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC-2, and the fittings additionally conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC-3.

b. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) conduit and fittings conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC-14 and Section 26 05 33.13.

2. For other conduit and conduit fittings, provide conduit of the types specified or indicated and that conform to the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13.

B. Wire: 1. Bare Ground Wire:

a. Soft drawn copper, Class A or Class B stranded, meeting the requirements of ASTM B3 for sizes #6 or larger.

b. Soft drawn solid copper, meeting the requirements of ASTM B3 for sizes #8 or smaller.

2. Insulated Ground Wire: a. Provide insulated Class B copper stranded wire rated for 600 volts that conforms to

the requirements of NEMA WC-7, and is green in color. Insulation type shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Continental Wire & Cable Company www.continentalwire.com b. SouthWire www.southwire.com c. General Cable www.generalcable.com d. Okonite Co. www.okonite.com e. Or Approved Equal



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. The Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, but due to their small scale, it

is not possible to indicate some offsets and fittings required nor the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered. a. Perform field measurements to discover offsets and fitting requirements not shown. b. Locate all on-site utilities and other obstructions in the area of construction, and

verify that interferences will not occur.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Layout electrical work to suit actual field conditions and in accordance with accepted standard practice.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform required earthwork including excavation, backfill, and compaction, as specified in Contract Documents.

B. Construct each ground system and connection so it is mechanically secure and electrically continuous. 1. Secure grounds to boxes in such a manner that each system is electrically continuous

from the point of service to each outlet. 2. Terminate conduits using double locknuts and bushings.

a. Unless a conduit run enters a metallic enclosure via integral threaded hubs, provide the conduit run with two locknuts.

3. Clean paint, grease and such other insulating materials from the contact points of grounds.

C. Equipment Ground Buses: 1. Whenever several pieces of equipment, other than service grounds, require external bond

wires in an area, provide an equipment ground bus. 2. Wherever 5 or more conduits enter a box or enclosure, provide an equipment ground bus.

a. Connect all equipment ground wires and conduit bond wires within the box or enclosure to a single ground stud or single common ground bus.

3. Size ground buses to carry 100 percent of the rating or setting of the largest over current device in the circuit(s) ahead of the equipment, conduit, or other item, and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Equipment Grounds: 1. Install equipment grounds in spaces accessible to authorized personnel only. 2. Equipment Grounding Connectors:

a. Only use approved grounding connectors. 1) Terminate grounds with closed lugs with star washers on both sides and a 1/4-

20 bolt and nut, minimum; spade lugs are not allowed. 2) For portable electrical equipment, provide electric cords having an equipment

grounding conductor and a NEMA and UL approved cord cap. b. Do not install grounding lugs on flanges, mounting screws, or standoffs in switches,

distribution boxes, or panels. c. Cover or coat grounding clamps and connectors with coating compound.

3. Equipment Grounding Conductors: a. Unless using multi-conductor cable, run equipment grounding conductors inside the

same conduit or wiring channel enclosing the power conductors.



b. In multi-conductor cable, locate grounding conductor inside the sheath or cable. c. Do not use a system neutral or a current carrying conductor as the equipment

grounding conductor. 1) Do not ground the electrical and electronic equipment neutral to chassis, racks,

equipment ground conductor, or any non-current carrying conductor on the equipment.

4. Grounding Lighting Fixtures: a. Provide the housing of each lighting fixture with a separate, factory-installed

grounding device and ground conductor. b. Use the factory-installed grounding device for connecting a separate grounding

conductor meeting applicable grounding requirements of the NEC to the fixture. 1) Provide a green covered grounding conductor of the same wire gauge as the

two power feed wires. 2) Provide a continuous ground for the fixture construction.

5. Grounding Motors: a. Install equipment grounding wire within conduit supplying power to motor. b. Install bonding connectors across the liquid tight flexible conduit supplying motors.

6. Grounding and Bonding Pumps: a. Provide a bond from each pump to its motor using a conductor equal in size to the

motor circuit equipment grounding conductors. 7. Grounding Transformers:

a. If a transformer is a separately derived system as defined in NFPA 70, provide a ground wire in both the primary and secondary conduits; and bond the ground wire and metallic conduits, if used, to the nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe or nearest effectively grounded structural steel column.

b. Provide an additional bond between cold or hot water pipes and structural steel located near a transformer bond connection.

8. Grounding Isolated Ground Receptacles: a. Ground the receptacle grounding terminal via an insulated equipment grounding

conductor routed with the circuit conductors within the raceway. 1) This grounding conductor may pass through one or more panelboards without

being connected to the panelboard grounding terminal in order to terminate directly at an equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable separately derived system or service within the same building or structure.

b. Use of isolated equipment grounding conductors does not remove the requirement for grounding the raceway system and outlet box.


A. Replace any finished exothermic welded splice connections that inspections find to be defective.


A. Site Testing: 1. Prior to energizing any system, test the resistance to ground for the system in accordance

with Section 26 05 63. a. Perform a continuity test from all utilization and distribution equipment to the ground

grid on a run-by-run basis.

B. Inspection: 1. Prior to completion of the Work of this Section, inspect the items provided for conformity

to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. a. Leave in-place "made grounds" open until they have been inspected and approved

by the Engineer.



b. Clean the surfaces involved in "made grounds" before connecting the grounds, and finish the installation with touch up painting or another protective coating to prevent corrosion.

2. Inspect finished exothermic welded connections for the following defects: a. Conductors appear within the splice area. b. Top of splice risers are below conductors. c. Surfaces exhibiting more than 20 percent slag material. d. Surfaces with over slag material that has flowed into conductors. e. Mold blowouts. f. Excessive porosity.

1) Small pores less than 1/32 inch are permitted.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished insulated wires from being painted.

B. Protect all ground grid wells from damage during paving and landscaping.

C. Protect all ground grid installations and ground wires from damage during the work of other Sections.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 28-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 28

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, cleaning, and protecting hanger and support

systems for electrical wiring, conduit boxes, and equipment.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI Standard Steels (Handbook).

B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated - Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength

Carbon Steel Plates. 6. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105

ksi, Minimum Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 8. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 9. ASTM A 575 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-

Grades. 10. ASTM A 576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special

Quality. 11. ASTM A 635/A 635M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-

Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled. 12. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,

Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

13. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

14. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts maximum).



E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 258 - Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid

Materials.

F. Society of Automotive Engineers International (SAE): 1. SAE J 429 - Mechanical and Material Requirements for Externally Threaded Fasterners.

G. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC Painting Manual.

a. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. b. SSPC-Paint 15 - Paint Specification No. 15, Steel Joist Shop Paint, Type I, Red

Oxide Paint, Type II, Asphalt Coating. c. SSPC-Paint 20 - Paint Specification No. 20, Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,”

and type II, “Organic”).

H. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 568 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems. 2. UL 635 - Standard for Insulating Bushings. 3. UL 870 - Standard for Wireways, Auxilliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. 4. UL 884 - Standard for Underfloor Raceways and Fittings. 5. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 6. UL 2239 - Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing, and Cable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Submittal Procedures, and Section 26 05 00, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: 1. Product Data:

a. Provide product data and catalog cuts for the products provided under this Section. 2. Shop Drawings:

a. Provide Shop Drawings. b. Provide Shop Drawings of hanging supports for conduit.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Design Data:

1) Provide structural calculations for the following items: a) Equipment backboards and support structures not directly fastened to the

walls. b) Hanging supports for conduit.

2) Detailed drawings of proposed departures from the original design. b. Certificates:

1) Testing Agency/Quality Verification: a) With the product data for electrical hangers and supports, provide

evidence of quality verification, listing, and labeling by the Electrical Testing Agency (ETA); either by a printed mark on the data, or by a separate listing card.

b) If an item does not have ETA quality assurance verification, provide a written quality assurance verification statement from the product manufacturer indicating why the item does not have the specified quality assurance verification. (1) Such quality assurance verification statements are subject to

approval by the Owner and the Engineer. 2) Manufacturers’ Certificate of Compliance.

c. Qualification Statements: 1) Manufacturers’ qualifications.




A. Qualifications; 1. Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) Qualifications:

a. Use the Electrical Testing Agency (ETA) qualified as specified in Section 26 05 00. 2. Manufacturers’ Qualifications:

a. Provide electrical support framing made by manufacturers that have been manufacturing support framing for a minimum of 5 years, and who carefully controls their operations to ensure that excellent product engineering, quality, safety, and reliability are achieved.

b. Submit the manufacturer’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.

B. Certifications: 1. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Certification:

a. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products.

2. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance: a. Submit a manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance certifying that both the

galvanizing and the products meet the requirements of the ASTM standards.


A. Packaging, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Deliver, store, and handle the hangers and supports in accordance with Section 26 05 00

Common Work Results for Electrical, and as specified herein. 2. Deliver material to Site in the original factory packaging.

B. Storage and Protection: 1. Shelter and store the components under cover, and supported off the ground and floors

on blocking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Carbon Steel Shapes: 1. Provide shapes of the sizes specified and as indicated on the Contract Drawings: 2. Provide steel shapes complying with the following material specifications for the type of

steel shape listed: a. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A 36M. b. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. c. Plates: ASTM A 283/A 283M. d. Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. e. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Schedule 40, hot-dipped, zinc-coated.

B. Welding materials: 1. Provide welding materials complying with the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M for the

type of material being welded.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Metal U-Channel Electrical Support Framing Systems and Fittings: 1. Carbon Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems:



a. Provide 1-5/8-inch nominal size U-channel supports fabricated from 12 gauge carbon steel electrolytically galvanized with a zinc-coating thickness commensurate with Service Condition SC 1 (mild) in conformance with the requirements of ASTM B 633. 1) For Type II ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framing from steel

complying with the requirements for Grade 33 specified in ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2) For Type III ASTM B 633 galvanized finishes, fabricate the framing from steel complying with the requirements of ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, ASTM A 635/A 635M, or ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Where combination members are required, spot-weld the members on 3-inch centers.

c. Provide 1-3/8-inch or larger depths, except where supports are mounted directly to walls 13/16-inch or larger depths may be provided.

d. Provide metal framing systems and fittings for metal framing systems from a single manufacturer.

e. Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut Corporation, Unistrut® Metal Framing System, www.unistrut.com. 2) Thomas & Betts, Kindorf®, http://elec-cat.tnb.com. 3) Cooper B-Line®, Inc., www.b-line.com.

2. Stainless Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems: a. Provide U-channel supports, fittings, threaded rod, and hardware fabricated from

Type 316 stainless steel. 3. PVC-Coated Steel U-Channel Support Framing Systems:

a. Provide U-channel supports, fittings, threaded rod, and hardware fabricated from PVC-coated carbon steel.

B. Nonmetallic Electrical Support Framing Systems and Fittings: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Angles, Channels, and Bars:

a. Provide non-metallic angles, channels, and bars fabricated from a high impact strength, fiberglass reinforced polyester formulation having a glass to resin ratio of 45 to 55 percent by weight.

b. Provide angles, channels, and bars that meet or exceed a Class 1 flame spread rating of less than 25 determined according to the requirements of ASTM E 84, and a smoke rating of 5 determined according to the requirements of the Smoke Chamber Test specified in NFPA 258.

c. Manufacturers: 1) Enduro Systems, Inc., www.endurocomposites.com. 2) Robroy Industries, www.robroy.com. 3) Approved equal.

2. Pre-Engineered Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Supporting Systems: a. Pre-engineered, UL-listed supporting systems fabricated from glass-fiber-reinforced

composites may be used in lieu of field-fabricated support systems. b. Manufacturers:

1) Unistrut, www.unistrut.com. 2) Allied Electrical Group, Aickinstrut Fiberglass Framing System,

www.alliedtube.com. 3) Enduro Systems, Inc., www.endurocomposites.com.

C. Conduit Supports: 1. Malleable Iron Conduit Supports:

a. Provide one-hole style galvanized malleable iron fasteners with pipe straps similar to those as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.

b. Provide support devices consisting of threaded rods, channel supports, and conduit straps/fasteners.

2. Stamped Steel Conduit Supports:



a. Provide one-hole style galvanized stamped steel fasteners with pipe straps similar to those as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.

b. Provide support devices consisting of threaded rods, channel supports, and conduit straps/fasteners.

3. Manufacturers: a. Thomas & Betts, http://www-public.tnb.com/contractor/docs/superstrut.pdf. b. Approved equal.

D. Cable Supports: 1. Provide voltage rated cable supports fabricated from hot-dip galvanized malleable iron

with a threaded collar. 2. Provide tapered wedging cable plugs fabricated from hard fiber, impregnated hardwood,

or canvas bakelite for the cable supports. 3. Manufacturers:

a. EGS Electrical Group, O-Z/Gedney, Inc., Type "M" b. Approved equal.

E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. For bolts, nuts, and washers smaller than 1/4-inch trade size, provide 316 stainless steel

fasteners complying with the requirements of ASTM A 325. 2. For fastening galvanized components, provide stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers

galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 325.

F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Drive (Deep-Pitch) Screws:

a. Provide Type 316 stainless steel self-tapping type drive (deep-pitch) screws that comply with the requirements of FF-S-107C(2).

2. Drilled-In Anchors and Fasteners: a. Provide drilled-in anchors and fasteners that comply with the requirements of

FF-S-107C(2). b. Masonry Anchors:

1) Provide masonry anchors designed to accept both machine bolts and threaded rods as fasteners. a) Provide SAE J 429 Grade 2 machine bolt fasteners fabricated from AISI

Type 316 stainless steel. b) Provide nuts and washers conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 563.

2) Provide masonry anchors consisting of an expansion shield and expander nut contained inside the shield. a) Expander Nuts:

(1) Fabricate square expander nuts with their sides tapered inward from the bottom to the top.

(2) Design the expander nuts to simultaneously climb the bolt or rod thread and expand the shield as soon as the threaded expander nut reaches and bears against the shield bottom when being tightened.

b) Expansion Shields: (1) Provide expansion shield bodies consisting of four legs, the inside of

each tapered toward the shield bottom, or nut end. (2) The end of one leg shall be elongated and turned across shield

bottom. Outer surface of shield body shall be ribbed for grip-action. 3) Masonry Anchor Material:

a) Provide die cast Zamac No. 3 zinc alloy having a 43,000 psi minimum tensile strength.

4) Manufacturers: a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc., FORWAY System, , www.mktfastening.com.

c. Concrete Anchors: 1) Carbon Steel Anchor/Fastener:



a) Provide UL listed one-piece studs (bolts) with integral expansion wedges, nuts, and washers.

2) Stainless Steel Anchor/Fastener: a) Provide one-piece AISI Type 303 or 304 stainless steel studs (bolts) with

integral expansion wedges, AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts, and AISI Type 316 stainless steel washers.

b) Provide stainless steel anchor/fasteners complying with the physical requirements of FF-S-325 for Group II, Type 4, Class 1.

3) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) U.S.E. Diamond, Inc.; SUP-R-STUD, www.mktfastening.com. b) Hilti Fastening Systems; KWIK-BOLT, hilti.com. c) Molly Fastener Group; PARABOLT. d) Phillips; RED HEAD Wedge-Anchor, www.phillipsfastener.com.

3. Hammer drive-type explosive charge drive-type anchors and fastener systems are unacceptable.

4. Lead shields, plastic-inserts, fiber-inserts, and drilled-in plastic sleeve/nail drive systems are unacceptable.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Seals: 1. Provide a hydrostatic seal to fill the annular space between conduit and through structure

openings. 2. Manufacturer:

a. PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp., Link-Seal®, www.linkseal.com.

B. Fire Seals: 1. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, floors, partitions, and ceiling, provide approved

fire seals to ensure that the fire rating is maintained. 2. Provide a fire seal system which is UL-listed for the application.

a. Provide fire seal compound or a mechanical seal for fire rating of 2 hours or less. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Compound Fire Seals: 1) Dow Corning Corporation, www.dowcorning.com. 2) 3M, http://solutions.3m.com/en_US/.

b. Mechanical Fire Seals: 1) PSI-ThunderLine/Link-Seal Corp., www.linkseal.com.

c. Through-Wall Barrier Fire Seals: 1) Cooper Crouse-Hinds, http://crouse-hinds.com.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in the largest sections practical for delivery to the Site.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Prime paint non-galvanized steel items. 1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with the requirements of SSPC-SP 2.

a. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 2. Prime Painting: Apply one coat of primer.

B. Galvanizing items specified above as galvanized. 1. Galvanize the items after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM A 123/A 123M.



2. Provide a minimum galvanized coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot (380 grams per square meter).

C. Touch-Up Primer: 1. For un-galvanized metal surfaces: Provide primer complying with the requirements of

SSPC-Paint 15 for Type I, Red Iron Oxide. 2. For galvanized surfaces: Provide primer complying with the requirements of

SSPC-Paint 20 for Type I, Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Field Measurement: 1. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field

measurements to verify actual conditions. a. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate all

offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

2. Carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions, and other construction work, at the Site which may affect the work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-place construction work, produce detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed departures from the original design due to field conditions or other causes. 1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade practice to suit

actual field measurements. 2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve access to

other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of the construction. 3. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes on the Shop

Drawings. 4. Submit the Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing the Work of

this Section.

B. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment, including equipment being installed by both electrical and other construction trades. 1. Set conduit and boxes only after receiving approved dimensions and checking such

equipment locations. 2. Arrange electrical Work accordingly and furnish such fittings and apparatus as required to

accommodate such conditions and to preserve access to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar spaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical Work in conformance to the requirements of NFPA 70 for wiring methods general requirements, and to other applicable Articles of the NEC governing methods of wiring.

B. Installing Anchors and Fasteners: 1. For anchoring or fastening applications in masonry and hollow-core precast concrete

structural elements, provide masonry anchors as specified herein. 2. For anchoring or fastening applications in cast-in-place concrete and solid precast

concrete structural elements, provide concrete anchors as specified herein.



3. Threaded Bolts: a. Draw threaded bolted connections up tight using 316 stainless steel lock washers to

prevent the bolt or nut from loosening. 4. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors:

a. Install expansion anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following. 1) Drill holes to the required diameter and depth in accordance with anchor

manufacturer's instructions for the size of anchor being installed. 2) Minimum Embedment:

a) Embed expansion anchors to four and one-half bolt diameters minimum unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.

C. Installation of U-Channel Support Framing Systems in accordance with Table 26 05 28-1 below:

Table 26 05 28-1 U-Channel Support Framing Selection

Condition 1 Condition 2 Type

Aboveground Interior NEMA 1/12 Stainless Steel, or Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Interior NEMA 4X Stainless Steel or Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

D. Installing Conduit Supports: 1. For interior locations, provide stamped steel conduit supports.

E. Panelboard/Enclosure Feed Risers: 1. Furnish and install cable supports in feeder risers as required by the underwriters.

F. Field Fabrication: 1. Fabricated Items:

a. Fabricate backboards, backboard supports, equipment supports, conduit supports, and the other items as detailed on the Contract Drawings. 1) Hot-dip galvanize mild-steel fabrications in accordance with the requirements of

ASTM A 153/A 153M. b. Fabricate backboard posts as detailed on the Contract Drawings from concrete filled

steel pipe with a crowned cap; and apply a prime paint finish. c. Supply components required for the anchorage of fabrications.

1) Except where specifically noted otherwise, fabricate anchors and related components from the same material as the fabrication and apply the same finish.

2. Tightly fit and secure joints. a. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. b. Weld fabricated assemblies in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1) Continuously seal joined members using intermittent welds and plastic filler. 2) Dress welds smooth and free of sharp edges and corners.

c. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with the adjacent finish surface. 3. Ease exposed edges to a small uniform radius.

a. Cut all backboard corners to a 1-inch radius. 4. For the attachment of work and for bolted connections, accurately drill or punch holes for

the fasteners as required. a. Burned holes are unacceptable. b. Provide holes no more than 3/32-inch larger than the fasteners.

5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings:



a. Except where specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, provide flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located, and consistent with the design of the component.

6. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), maximum difference in diagonal measurements. b. Maximum offset between faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). c. Maximum misalignment of adjacent members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). d. Maximum bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). e. Maximum deviation from plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).


A. Coatings: 1. Repair damage to coatings.

a. Touch up damaged coating surfaces using the specified primer for primed steel surfaces, and using zinc-rich primer for galvanized steel surfaces.


A. Inspection: 1. Verify the adequacy of coatings. 2. Inspect the items provided under this Section for adherence to the fabrication tolerances

specified above, and correct any discrepancies:

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect the items provided under this Section from damage during the work of other trades.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 33.13-1 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 33.13

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, energizing, and testing conduit, tubing, and fittings

for communication lines and electrical transmission, distribution, and service lines.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical. 3. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 2. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated (GCR). 3. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated (EMT).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 568/A 568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength,

Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements for. 2. ASTM D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride ) (CPVC) Compounds.

C. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 2. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 1. ANSI/UL 6 - Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit. 1. ANSI/UL 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 2. ANSI/UL 498 - Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 3. ANSI/UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes. 4. ANSI/UL 797 - Electric Metallic Tubing - Steel. 5. ANSI/UL 886 - Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified)

Locations. 6. ANSI/UL 1203 - Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment

for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 7. ANSI/UL 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Conduit – Steel

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions for all items are as stated in NFPA 70, IEEE C2, and in other reference documents unless otherwise stated, specified, or noted.


A. Conduit Systems: 1. Provide conduit of the type and material shown in Table 26 05 33.13-3for the application

indicated, or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide conduit fittings made of material identical to that of the conduit system with which

they are used.

Table 26 05 33.13-3 Conduit System Selection

Location Condition 1 Condition 2 Conduit Type Size

(Minimum) 1

Above-Ground

Outside Exposed to weather NEMA 3R/4 Locations

Rigid Galvanized Steel 3/4 Inch

NEMA 4X

Locations

PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel

3/4 Inch

Covered or Protected from weather NEMA 3R/4 Locations


Inside

NEMA 1/12

Within 6-inches of floor when exposed

PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel

3/4 Inch

Within 6-inches of floor when within footprint of floor mounted equipment

PVC Schedule 40 3/4 Inch

Above suspended ceilings

Electrical Metal Tubing or Rigid Galvanized Steel

3/4 Inch

Concealed in Open-Cell Masonry Block Wall

Electrical Metal Tubing or PVC Schedule 40

3/4 Inch

Concealed in Cast-in-Place Concrete Wall or Floor


Concealed behind Gypsum Board Wall or Ceiling


3/4 Inch

Recess Mounted Lighting Fixtures and Rotating or Vibrating Equipment

Flexible Metal Conduit or Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

3/4 Inch



Table 26 05 33.13-3 Conduit System Selection

Location Condition 1 Condition 2 Conduit Type Size

(Minimum) 1

Exposed within 10’-0” AFF

Rigid Galvanized Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit

3/4 Inch

Exposed above 10’-0” AFF


3/4 Inch

1 No conduit smaller than 3/4-inch trade size is permitted unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer in strict accordance with the provisions of Section 26 05 00 for review:

1. Product Data: a. To facilitate power utility approval of the items installed from the utility’s service poles

to the main service panels, submit 4 more copies of the conduit submittals than the number required by Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.

b. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. c. Non-metallic conduit solvent. d. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). e. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). f. Plastic coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. g. Liquidtite flexible metal conduit. h. Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS). i. Fittings for non-metallic conduit systems. j. Fittings for metallic conduit systems. k. Conduit spacers. l. Heat shrink tubing. m. Wall and floor penetration seals. n. Cold galvanize coating.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Proposed departures from the original design.

3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualification Statements:

1) Qualifications of the installer. 2) Qualifications of the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).

b. Certificates: 1) Testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling.



a. Employ an installation firm with a minimum of three years documented experience installing conduit and tubing similar in type and scope to that required by this Contract to install the Work of this Section.

b. Employ skilled licensed electricians to supervise the Work of this Section. c. Submit information verifying the installer’s qualifications.



d. To assure correct installation of PVC Coated Conduit Systems and Fittings; submit installers current and unexpired certification provided by the Manufacturer of the products being installed

2. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications: a. Employ an independent testing agency, qualified as specified in Section 26 05 00

Common Work Results for Electrical, to perform the testing required by this Section. b. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in NFPA 70

(NEC), and to other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.

2. All items installed from utility service poles to the main service panels must be approved by the serving utility, whether electrical service or telephone service, as listed in Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.


Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location the product is installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these nationally recognized testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products.

a. Submit evidence with the Product Data that the products represented meet testing agency quality verification requirements, including agency listing and labeling requirements. 1) Such evidence may consist of either a printed mark on the data or a separate

listing card. b. Submit a written statement from those product manufacturers that do not provide

evidence of the quality of their products that indicates why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. 1) Such statements provided in lieu of quality assurance verification are subject to

the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Pack, ship, handle, and unload products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26

05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Acceptance products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00

Common Work Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00 Common Work

Results for Electrical, and as detailed herein. a. Store all products indoors on blocking or pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit: 1. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:



a. Provide high impact PVC conduit conforming to the requirements of NEMA TC 2 at 90 degrees Celsius, and made from compounds conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1784. 1) Use material that at 78 degrees Fahrenheit has a tensile strength exceeding

5500 psi, a flexural strength exceeding 11,000 psi, and a compressive strength exceeding 800 psi,

b. Provide PVC conduits that are UL listed, labeled, or approved for both underground and above ground use.

2. Manufacturers: a. JM Eagle, www.jmeagle.com b. Queen City Plastics, Inc., www.queencityplastics.com. c. Approved equal.

B. Non-Metallic Conduit Solvent: 1. Provide solvent for non-metallic conduit joints from the same manufacturer as the conduit

and conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 2564.

2.02 METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Provide electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to the requirements of Article 358 in

NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 2. Provide galvanized steel tubing conduit lengths bearing the manufacturer’s trademark. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduit, www.alliedtube.com b. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Company,

www.wheatland.com. c. Or Approved equal.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Provide intermediate metal conduit (IMC) conforming to the requirements of Article 342 in

NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 2. Fabricate intermediate metal conduit (IMC) from high strength low alloy sheet steel meeting

the requirements for ASTM A 568 piping, galvanized inside and outside, and protected against corrosion by a dichromate rinse or a zinc chromate coating.

3. Provide conduit furnished in 10-foot minimum lengths with both ends threaded and one end fitted with a coupling.

4. Manufacturers: a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduit, www.alliedtube.com. b. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Company,

www.wheatland.com. c. Approved equal.

C. PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: 1. Provide PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit bearing the UL label. 2. Provide base conduit of rigid hot-dip galvanized steel conduit as specified in Paragraph

2.02E, and of the type indicated, specified, or scheduled to be coated. 3. Apply PVC coating in accordance with the following:

a. Apply a 40-mil thick PVC coating on the outside and a 2-mil thick fusion-bonded urethane coating on the inside, exterior coatings conforming to the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

b. Provide PVC coating of one uniform color on all PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit provided for the Contract.

4. Provide 40-mil thick PVC sleeves to protect internally threaded conduit openings.



a. Provide sleeves with an inside diameter equal to the outside diameter of the conduit/pipe protected by it; and extending either one pipe diameter or 2-inches, whichever is less, beyond the opening.

5. Manufacturers: a. OCAL, http://www.tnb.com/contractor/docs/ocal.pdf. b. Plasti-Bond www.plastibond.com c. Perma-Cote www.permacote.com d. KorKap www.korkap.com

D. Liquidtite Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Provide PVC coated flexible metal conduit conforming to the requirements of Article 350 of

NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses and ANSI/UL 360. 2. Provide conduit with interlocking spiral strip construction capable of bending to a minimum

radius of five times its diameter without deforming the spiral strips both inside and outside of the conduit.

a. Provide conduit with a flexible, galvanized, interlocking spiral strip steel core jacketed with smooth, liquid-tight polyvinyl chloride designed to withstand temperatures from minus 40 degrees Celsius to plus 60 degrees Celsius.

3. Finish the interior and exterior of flexible conduit smooth and free from burrs, sharp edges, and other defects that may injure wires; and place the manufacturer’s trademark on each length.

4. Furnish an integral continuous copper ground in 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch PVC coated flexible metal conduit.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Electri-Flex Company, Liquatite®, Type LA, www.electriflex.com. b. ANAMET Electrical, Inc., Anaconda Sealtite®, www.anacondasealtite.com. c. Approved equal.

E. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS) conforming to the requirements of Article 344

of NFPA 70 (NEC) for materials and uses, ANSI C80.1, and UL 6. 2. Fabricate the RGS from mild steel piping, galvanized or sherardized inside and outside, and

protected against corrosion by a dichromate rinse or a zinc chromate coating. 3. Provide defect free conduit bearing the UL label, and furnished in 10-foot minimum lengths

with both ends threaded and one end fitted with a coupling. a. Provide tapered NTP 3/4 inch per foot threads complying with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tyco/Allied Tube and Conduit, www.alliedtube.com. b. Wheatland Tube Company, Division of John Maneely Company,

www.wheatland.com. c. Approved equal.

F. Flexible Coupling for Hazardous Locations: 1. Provide flexible brass or stainless steel coupling conforming to the requirements of NFPA 70

(NEC) for materials in hazardous rated environments and ANSI/UL 1203. 2. Provide coupling designed to withstand temperatures up to 148 degrees Celsius. 3. Finish the interior of flexible coupling smooth and free from burrs, sharp edges, and other

defects that may injure wires; and place the manufacturer’s label on each length. 4. Furnish an integral continuous copper ground in all flexible couplings. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers

a. EGS/O-Z/Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. b. Approved equal.

2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Non-Metallic Conduit Systems:



1. Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit: a. Provide high impact non-metallic fittings conforming to same requirements as for the

plastic tubing and conduit as specified in Article 2.01. b. Non-Metallic Conduit Expansion Fittings:

1) Provide a two-piece nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonconductive, UL listed expansion fitting.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Lamson & Sessions, Carlon®, www.carlon.com. 2) Queen City Plastics, Inc., www.queencityplastics.com. 3) Approved equal.

B. Fittings for Threaded Metallic Conduit Systems: 1. Construct conduit bodies/fittings from cast malleable iron or cast steel. 2. For PVC coated raceway systems, provide PVC coated fittings of cast malleable iron or cast

steel from the same manufacturer that provides the uncoated conduit bodies/fittings. 3. Conduit Outlet Bodies:

a. Provide malleable iron threaded entry type conduit outlet bodies with neoprene gaskets and cast steel cover.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) EGS/Appleton Electric, www.appletonelec.com. 2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. 3) Approved equal.

4. Conduit Expansion Joints: a. Provide telescoping sleeve type galvanized, weatherproof, and vapor tight conduit

expansion joints designed for 4-inch maximum expansion with an insulated bushing and lead-wool packing.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) EGS/Appleton Electric, www.appletonelec.com. 2) EGS/O-Z/Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. 3) Approved equal.

5. Conduit Unions: a. Provide conduit unions capable of completing a conduit run when neither conduit end

can be turned. b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, UNF and UNY Unions, www.appletonelec.com.. 2) Thomas and Betts Company, Erickson® Coupling.,

www.tnb.com/contractor/docs/tbhazardous.pdf 3) Approved equal.

6. Conduit Outlet Boxes: a. Provide malleable or cast iron conduit outlet boxes conforming to the requirements of

UL 886, and having a cover with O-rings to keep out moisture. b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, GRF outlets and covers, www.appletonelec.com. 2) EGS/O-Z Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. 3) Approved equal.

7. Conduit Device Boxes: a. Provide malleable iron conduit device boxes with internal grounding screws and

conforming to the requirements of UL 498 and UL 514A. b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, FD device boxes, www.appletonelec.com. 2) EGS/O-Z Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. 3) Approved equal.

8. Conduit Sealing Fittings: a. Provide, triple coated, malleable iron conduit sealing fittings.

1) Coat the conduit sealing fittings with zinc electroplate, dichromate, and an epoxy powder coat.



b. Provide drain fittings in conduit sealing fittings where required. c. Provide sealing covers for junction boxes where required. d. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) EGS/Appleton Electric, www.appletonelec.com. a) Sealing hubs: ES. b) Sealing fittings: EY, EYS, EYSF, EYSM, EUS, EYD, EYDM

2) EGS/O-Z Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. 3) Approved equal.

C. Fittings for Electrical Metallic Tubing Conduit Systems: 1. Construct conduit bodies/fittings from cast steel. 2. Fittings may be either set-screw or compression type. 3. Fittings shall be galvanized or zinc electroplated.

2.04 CONDUIT SPACERS

A. Provide non-metallic, interlocking type conduit spacers which snap together to join any combination of intermediate and base units together, both vertically and horizontally.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Underground Devices Inc., www.udevices.com. 2. The George-Ingraham Corp. 3. Approved equal.

2.05 HEAT SHRINK TUBING

A. Provide all-weather corrosion resistant vinyl plastic heat shrink tubing designed for application on the exterior of metallic conduit to protect against galvanic action, moisture or other deteriorating contaminants.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Electronics, Raychem, www.raychem.com. 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Approved equal

2.06 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION SEALS

A. Provide watertight mechanical seals capable of holding up to 20 psig, and sealing against water, soil, and backfill material.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Thunderline/Link-Seal, www.linkseal.com. 2. Flexicraft Industries, PipeSeal, lhttp://flexicraft.com. 3. Approved equal.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Cold Galvanize Coating: 1. Provide a cold galvanize coating to provide protection against corrosion by forming an

insoluble zinc salt barrier from a cathodic reaction when the coating is damaged by abrasion and exposed to weather.

a. Provide a single component pre-mixed liquid organic zinc compound producing 95 percent zinc in the dry film.

b. Provide a coating that bonds to clean iron, steel, or aluminum through electrochemical action.



2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ZRC. Worldwide, www.zrcworldwide.com. b. Clearco c. Krylon d. Rustoleum e. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Although the Contract Drawings are generally indicative of the Work, take field measurements to verify actual conditions.

1. Due to the small scale of the Contract Drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and apparatus required or the minor structural obstructions that may be encountered during the Work.

B. Inspect the condition of existing conduit that is required for the Work of this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. After carefully investigating structural and finish conditions and other in-place construction work, prepare and submit detailed Shop Drawings showing proposed departures from the original design due to field conditions or other causes.

1. Layout the electrical work according to accepted standard electrical trade practice to suit actual field measurements.

2. Arrange the electrical work to consider existing conditions and to preserve access to other equipment, rooms, areas, and similar features of the construction.

3. Include plan and profile views of duct banks. 4. Indicate the location and details of conflicting utility construction and slopes. 5. Submit these Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval prior to performing the Work of

this Section.

B. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts for all products provided under this Section. 1. Clearly indicate the usage of each product on the submittal.

C. Obtain roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment, including equipment being installed by both electrical and other construction trades.

1. Set conduit and boxes only after receiving approved dimensions and checking such equipment locations.

D. Remove dirt, debris, and other obstructions from existing conduit required for the Work of this Section by blowing out and mandreling the conduits as applicable.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform the Work of this Section as specified in Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Fabricate and install conduit and wireway systems in accordance with accepted electrical trade standard practice.

1. Layout the electrical work of this Section to suit actual field measurements. a. Record the actual installed elevations and locations of duct banks and the as-found

locations of conflicting utility lines on the record drawings specified in Section 01780, Closeout Submittals, and submit the record drawings.



2. Install the electrical Work of this Section in conformance to the wiring methods general requirements of Article 300 in NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all other applicable Articles of NFPA 70 governing wiring methods.

3. Cut conduit and wireway square, and ream the cut ends according to the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC) to deburr the openings so that they are not restricted more than cuts made by the material manufacturer.

4. Avoid bending conduits as much as possible and practical; but if bends are made, use an approved conduit bending tool or machine to make the bends.

5. Do not install crushed or deformed conduit, and remove crushed or deformed conduit from the Site.

6. On conduit that is installed outside, provide a second equipment ground conductor and use fittings with a built-in ground lug for bonding.

7. Provide flexible conduit only to the extent permitted by NFPA 70 (NEC). a. In flexible conduits that do not have an integral ground wire, install a green insulated

wire in addition to the neutral wire for grounding purposes. 1) Form a ‘J’ or ‘S’ hook with a drip loop to allow flexibility. 2) Provide a second equipment grounding conductor on outside conduit and

provide fittings with built-in ground lug for bonding. b. In exposed areas, use PVC coated flexible metal conduit and fittings. c. Use flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connection to

recessed lighting fixtures and rotating and vibrating equipment. 1) Flexible Metal Conduit is only permitted for final connections to lighting fixtures

in dry, environmentally conditioned spaces. 2) Liquid tight flexible metal conduit, as herein specified, for final connection to

recess mounted lighting fixtures in unconditioned spaces and to all rotating and vibrating equipment including transformers, motors, solenoid valves, pressure switches, limit switches, generators, engine-mounted devices and pipe-mounted devices.

3) Flexible conduit not to exceed 18 inches in length for motor connections, 36 inches in length for equipment connections or 72-inches for lighting fixture connections.

8. Provide fittings and apparatus as required to construct the approved electrical design. a. Running threads on conduit are not permitted.

1) Where couplings and connectors are required for metal conduits, use approved threaded couplings and connectors.

b. Provide conduit unions where necessary to complete a conduit run when neither conduit end can be turned.

c. Where conduit and raceway runs cross building expansion joints, make provision for expansion in the conduit and raceway runs.

d. Provide sealing fittings with drain fittings in all lower runs and vertical runs. e. Provide sealing covers for junction boxes where required. f. Provide weatherproof conduit hubs on all conduit connections exterior to the building,

and on instruments, process equipment, and pump motors. 9. Installing RGS and PVC Coated Conduit:

a. Installation of the RGS and PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. To assure correct installation of PVC Coated Conduit System, the installer shall have a current and unexpired certification provided by the Manufacturer to install coated conduit.

c. Threading Conduit: 1) Field thread the conduits per the manufacturers instructions.

a) For PVC coated conduit, first use a cylindrical guide, oversized to fit over the plastic coating, to neatly cut the coating off at the proposed end of the threads.

b) Do not damage or remove the coating beyond the proposed end of the threads.



2) Once the threading operation is complete, protect the newly cut threads against corrosion by applying a "sealing" compound as recommended by the manufacturer.

d. Assembling RGS and PVC Coated Conduit Fittings: 1) Use PVC coated conduit bodies, clamps, supports, accessories, and fittings

with coated conduit systems. 2) Just prior to assembling each conduit joint, apply the conduit manufacturer's

touch-up compound to the end of the conduit in the area normally covered by the fitting sleeve.

3) Use cloth or other material over strap type wrenches to protect the coating while tightening conduits.

C. Exposed Work: 1. In exposed work, run conduit and raceway parallel to centerlines and structure surfaces; or

perpendicular to centerlines where required, with right angle turns consisting of symmetrical bends or fittings.

2. Maintain at least 6 inches clearance between conduit and raceway runs and pipes, ducts, and flues of mechanical systems.

3. If a portion of a metallic conduit run, whether plastic-coated or not, extends above grade or is otherwise exposed to personnel, ensure that the conduit is properly bonded to an equipment grounding conductor at both ends.

a. Install the equipment grounding conductor either inside or outside the box.

D. Concealed Work: 1. When performing electrical work in concealed spaces, provide the same quality

workmanship as in exposed work. 2. Conceal conduits and raceways in the structure’s construction where practicable unless

otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings or required by the Engineer. a. Group conduit and raceway runs in concealed work as much as practical to avoid

congesting the concealed spaces. b. Do not weaken the structure by excessive or unnecessary cutting.

1) Only make cuts into the structure’s construction in conformance to the applicable building codes.

3. Conduits and Raceways Embedded in Concrete Slabs: a. Separate multiple conduits encased together by not less than two inches of concrete. b. Locate conduit installed in floor slabs within the reinforced area of the slab. c. Where conduit crosses expansion joints, provide weather tight expansion and

defection fittings and bonding jumpers. 4. Install below grade conduit in conformance with the requirements of Section33 71 19,

Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. a. For conduits that pass under building support walls, provide a minimum of 3 inches

of concrete encasement all around. b. For underground and concrete encased duct banks, provide non-metallic conduit

spacers. 1) Provide sufficient space to allow pouring the concrete envelope without

displacing or shifting the individual conduits. 2) Install conduit spacers at intervals not exceeding five feet.

E. Hangers and Supports: 1. Install auxiliary support structures, anchors, and fasteners as specified in Section 26 05 28,

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. a. Mount or suspend conduit and wireway systems directly on structural members of

the structures and walls. b. Do not attach conduit or raceway systems to suspended ceiling members or to the

suspending mediums. c. Securely attach anchors into walls.



2. At all conduit attachments, allow space between the mounting surfaces and the conduit by providing U-channel supports, clamp-backs, or spacers.

a. Attach wall-mounted conduit runs close to the walls following the contour of the walls, parallel to the walls and other building lines except at bends.

F. Structure Penetrations: 1. Make penetrations in existing concrete structures by core-drilling.

a. Drill the penetrations true, clean, and free from spalling. 2. At penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and similar assemblies, provide firestopping. 3. Make floor penetrations as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

a. Seal all conduit penetrations through floor slabs on grade in buildings with a floor penetration seal.

4. Install a wall penetration seal at all wall penetrations. a. Size wall penetrations to accommodate the conduit outside diameter plus either 1/4

inch or a hole allowance to allow the installation of the wall penetration seal. 5. For conduits that enter rooms from concrete floors or masonry, provide corrosion protection

by using an RGS or PVC coated conduit that extends from 12 inches inside the concrete or masonry to at least 6 inches into the room.

G. Wiring: 1. Install wiring in conduit as indicated. 2. Prior to the installation of any wire, verify that the conduit is clean and free of debris. 3. Install a separate ground conductor within every conduit.


A. Inspection: 1. Inspect installed conduit runs for obstructions, proper support, proper grounding, and

completeness.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 33.23-1 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 33.23

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, cleaning, and protecting electrical pull

and junction boxes.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 6. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical

Metallic Tubing and Cable. 3. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z55.1 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus & Equipment (withdrawn 1990, no

replacement).

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 886 - Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use In hazardous (Classified)

Locations.


A. Product Data: 1. Submit a list of the materials proposed to satisfy the requirements of this Section. 2. Submit the manufacturer's comprehensive calculations used to determine size

requirements for the boxes. 3. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts of the materials and equipment proposed to be used

to satisfy the requirements of this Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Submittal Procedures:

1. Product Data: a. List of the proposed materials.



b. Catalog cuts of steel outlet boxes for general purpose applications used with steel conduit systems.

c. Catalog cuts of cast outlet boxes for general purpose applications used with steel conduit systems.

d. Catalog cuts of cast outlet boxes for general purpose applications used with coated conduit systems.

e. Catalog cuts of sheet metal boxes for general purpose applications in dry locations. f. Catalog cuts of equipment and control device enclosures for all areas except outdoor

and corrosive locations. 2. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data. 1) Manufacturer's comprehensive calculations.

b. Test Reports. 1) Factory test reports.

c. Certificates. 1) Testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling.

d. Qualification Statements. 1) Qualifications of the licensed electricians. 2) Qualifications of the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).



a. To supervise installation of the Work of this Section, employ licensed electricians. 1) Submit the qualifications of the licensed electricians supervising the Work of this

Section. 2. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications:

a. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in Articles

250, 300, and 370 of NFPA 70 (NEC), and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.


Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and listed and labeled or approved for the application intended as indicated or specified, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not readily available or unless standards do not exist for the products. a. Provide products that are approved, listed, and labeled for the short circuit currents,

voltages, and currents indicated or specified to be applied. b. Provide service entrance labeled products for all service entrance equipment.

2. Submit evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling for each product with the submitted product data, either by providing a printed mark on the data or by attaching a separate listing card. a. For items without such evidence, submit a written statement from the product


1.06 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Pack, ship, handle, and unload products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26

05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.



B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00,

Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00, Common Work

Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names: 1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the basis of

design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required. 2. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose products are

equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contract requirements.


A. Steel Outlet and Device Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For general purpose applications in dry, flush (in-wall) locations only, provide UL Listed

galvanized steel outlet and device boxes conforming to NEMA OS 1. a. Boxes shall be fabricated from steel not less than 0.062" thickness. b. Boxes shall have standard trade size knockouts to facilitate conduit and cable

connector attachments. c. Boxes shall be equipped with one 10-32 tapped hole for ground wire attachment.

2. Ceiling fan and light fixture bar hangers shall be UL Listed for 35 pound fan and 50 pound fixture.

3. Manufacturers: a. Appleton Electric b. O-Z/Gedney c. Crouse Hinds d. Thomas & Betts e. Or Approved Equal

B. Cast Outlet Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For Use with Steel Conduit Systems:

a. For use with steel conduit systems, provide UL Listed small cast steel or cast malleable iron outlet boxes with threaded hubs that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12 enclosures.

b. If covers are indicated or specified, provide cast steel or cast malleable iron covers with neoprene gaskets. 1) Provide captive Type 316 stainless steel mounting screws for the covers.

c. If fixture hangers are indicated or specified, provide ball type cast steel or cast malleable iron fixture hangers with neoprene gaskets. 1) Provide captive Type 316 stainless steel mounting screws for the fixture

hangers. d. Finish:

1) Provide outlet boxes, covers, and hangers with an electroplated zinc coating, followed first by a dichromatic prime, and then by an aluminum polymer finish coating conforming to NEMA FB 1.

e. Manufacturers: 1) Appleton Electric 2) O-Z/Gedney 3) Crouse Hinds



4) Thomas & Betts 5) Killark 6) Or Approved equal.

C. Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull and

terminal boxes and covers that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12 enclosures with continuously welded and ground smooth seams, and having no holes or knockouts. a. Cover:

1) Provide overlapping sheet steel screw covers with captivated screws for each box.

2) Provide a means of bonding on the cover. b. Gasket: Provide an oil resistant cover gasket for each box. c. Mounting Brackets:

1) Provide 12 gauge steel wall-mounting brackets. d. Finish:

1) Provide polyester powder coating applied over phosphatized surfaces. 2) Color: ANSI Z55.1 Number 61 gray.

2. Manufacturers: a. Pentair, Screw Cover SC Junction Boxes b. Rittal Corp c. Milbank Manufacturing d. Or Approved Equal

D. Ground Lug/Bus Bar: 1. Provide a copper ground lug or a 1/4-inch by 2-inch copper bus bar in large pull and

junction boxes.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: 1. Submit factory test reports to the Engineer as specified for the products in this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Install the work of this Section only under the supervision of licensed electricians.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conduit stub-ups to be mated with electrical boxes and enclosures are the correct type and size, and are at the proper location.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes for General Purpose Applications: 1. For general purpose applications in dry locations, provide small sheet steel pull and

terminal boxes that meet the NEMA 250 requirements for Type 12. 2. Provide boxes that are fabricated from the same type of material as the conduit with which

the boxes are used.

B. Installing Boxes for Electrical Outlets and Devices: 1. Install boxes level and plumb within 1/16-inch of vertical or horizontal over the length of the

box.



2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, devices boxes for interior or exterior wiring devices of buildings shall be recessed within the wall construction. The installation of surface mounted device boxes is prohibited.

3. Install device boxes at a uniform height as indicated on the Contract Drawings. a. Mount all adjacent boxes in alignment at the same mounting height. b. Mount outlet boxes for equipment within 18-inches of the equipment power

connection. 4. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls.

a. Provide a minimum separation of 6 inches (150 mm). b. Provide a minimum separation of 24inches (600 mm) s in acoustic rated walls.

5. When installing boxes outside or to exposed conduit, provide cast boxes. a. For interior unfinished locations mount these boxes on spacers to be 1/8-inch from

wall unless box has built-in raised pads to perform the same function. 6. When installing boxes for single devices, two devices, or wall outlets, install 4-inch square

boxes with appropriate plaster rings. a. Space boxes on opposite sides of the wall 6 inches apart. b. Set plaster rings flush or to protrude less than 1/16-inch from the wall. c. Openings for boxes in finished walls must be within 1/16-inch of the box.

1) Correct all oversize openings in accordance with the specifications for the wall material.

7. Outlet boxes must be of the one-piece type, the use of expandable sheet metal boxes is prohibited.

8. Support cast boxes for outlet and device using one of the following methods: a. Mount the boxes directly to the structure using 4 or more anchors.

1) Attach mounting screws to feet located outside of the box interior. 2) Provide 1/4-inch spacers behind the boxes unless the box has raised pads.

b. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which are supported within 12-inches of the box.

c. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which exit from a poured concrete floor no further than 18-inches from the box.

C. Installing Boxes for Other than Electrical Outlets and Devices: 1. Accurately punch holes for conduit openings using a hydraulic punch and punches sized

for the conduit to be installed. 2. Install a conduit breather in the top of the box and a conduit drain fitting in the bottom of all

boxes not located in bone-dry areas that are at least 100 feet from a hose-bib. 3. Support boxes for other than electrical outlets and devices using one of the following

methods: a. Mount the boxes directly to the structure using 4 or more anchors.

1) Attach mounting screws to feet located outside of the box interior. or seal the screw holes to prevent water penetration.

2) Provide 1/4-inch spacers behind the boxes unless the box has raised pads. b. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which are supported within 12-inches

of the box. c. Attach the box to two 1-inch or larger conduits which exit from a poured concrete

floor no further than 18-inches from the box. d. Mount the box on U-channel and structural supports conforming to Section 26 05 28,

Hangers and Supports.

D. Make up all conduit connections to boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.13, Conduit and Tubing.

E. Install wiring in boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Wire, Cable, and Accessories.

F. Ground boxes in conformance with Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding.




A. Touch up damaged coatings on electrical boxes and enclosures.


A. Site Tests: 1. Test all boxes to verify that they are properly connected to the grounding system.

B. Inspection: 1. Inspect flush boxes to verify that the opening between the box and the wall finish is less

than 1/16-inch. 2. Inspect flush boxes to verify that each box is flush with the wall, or protrudes less than

1/16-inch, and is not set behind the wall surface. 3. Inspect surface mounted boxes to verify that they are level and plumb within 1/16-inch as

specified.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Clear and dispose of waste materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05

00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Except for surfaces to be painted, mask electrical boxes to protect them from paint overspray or over-brushing during painting operations.

B. Protect boxes against damage from other work.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 53-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 53

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, and protecting identification signs and labels for

electrical systems.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors. 3. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. 3. NFPA 704, Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response

D. International Code Council 1. International Fire Code (IFC)

E. U. S. Government: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

a. 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Mimic bus refers to a graphical representation of the devices and bus work within an item of electric equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00: 1. Product Data:

a. Provide catalog cuts for the actual products provided, and indicate clearly the usage of each product.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Provide a schedule depicting all nametag legends. b. Provide drawings of typical nametags.




A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the all applicable requirements of OSHA, but particularly those stated in 29

CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Comply with the requirements of NFPA 70E that are applicable to electrical identification

items as listed below in this Specification Section.


A. Protect items from damage during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and as detailed below.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products meeting the specified requirements from one of the following manufacturers, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Brady Worldwide, Inc., P. O. Box 2131, Milwaukee, WI 53201-2131, Telephone (414)

358-6600. 2. Seton Identification Products, 20 Thompson Road, P. O. Box 819, Branford, CT 06405-

0819, Telephone (800) 243-6624.. 3. LEM Products, Inc.; P. O. Box 190, 4089 Landisville Road, Doylestown, PA 18901,

Telephone (800) 220-2400 or (215) 348-9900.

B. To serve as examples of the quality required of the specified products, several Brady Worldwide, Inc. Product Numbers are listed for informational purposes only.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Laminated Phenolic or Plastic: 1. Provide rigid, thermosetting resin or polymer material that is heat- and fire-resistant,

abrasion resistant, electronically non-conductive, and non-corroding. 2. Extrude the thermosetting resin or polymer into sheets, and laminate the sheets together

so that colored top and bottom layers sandwich a contrasting color core in the middle.

B. Mounting Hardware: 1. Provide number 10 hex-head machine screws and lock-washers, or hex-head bolts, lock-

washers, and nuts for mounting identification nameplates onto electrical equipment. 2. Provide either type 316 stainless steel or brass fasteners; however, all fasteners used on

the same nameplate must be of the same material.

2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

A. Provide laminated phenolic or plastic equipment identification nameplates having beveled edges and engraved lettering. 1. Drill holes for mounting hardware in the equipment identification nameplates as follows:

a. For nameplates that are more then 2 inches wide, drill four holes. b. For nameplates that are more than 1-1/2 inches high, drill four mounting holes. c. For smaller nameplates, drill holes for two fasteners.

2. Provide equipment identification nameplates long enough to ensure that the heads of fastening hardware do not extend beyond the nameplate material, and come no closer than 1/16-inch to the nearest letter of the nameplate legend and no closer than 1/16-inch to the nearest edge.



B. Engrave the following information on each equipment identification nameplate, similar to that shown in Examples 1 and 2 below except appropriate for the specific equipment being identified: 1. In the first line, indicate the equipment type and identification number. 2. In the second line, indicate the equipment Voltage, the equipment current if known, the

phase, and the number of wires. a. If the current is listed, provide a description that further identifies the current, such as

“overload protection current”, full load amps (FLA), or other information identifying the current indicated.

3. In the third line, indicate the words “SERVED FROM” followed by the serving equipment and the branch circuit. a. If multiple sources serve the equipment, list all sources on succeeding lines.

EXAMPLE 1:

POWER PANELBOARD PPB-2

208/120 VOLTS, 10.8 FLA, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE SERVED FROM

PPB-1, CIRCUITS F1 THROUGH T1

C. Engrave the following information on identification plate for any distribution equipment (i.e. switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, switchgear, etc). 1. The conductor insulation color coding for feeder and branch circuit wiring originating from

each piece of distribution equipment per NFPA 70. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 19 for wire and cable color coding requirements.

EXAMPLE for 208Y/120 volt equipment:

PHASE COLOR A BLACK B RED C BLUE

GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL)

WHITE

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR

GREEN

D. Engrave equipment identification nameplates with all capital, Helvetica Medium font, or equal, lettering. 1. Provide black letters on a white background, except for warning nameplates provide white

lettering centered on red backgrounds. 2. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch border between the nameplate lettering and the tops and

bottoms of the nameplates. 3. Use 3/8-inch high letters for the first line, and 1/4-inch letters for succeeding lines; except,

in cases where the tag will not fit because the equipment is too small, use 3/16-inch letters for the first line and 1/8-inch letters for succeeding lines.

2.04 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY LABELS

A. Conduit Voltage Markers: 1. Provide conduit markers consisting of polymer-coated cloth tape with a printable top coat

and a rubber based pressure sensitive adhesive on the back to provide oil and water



resistance, good print durability, and the flexibility to allow it to be wrapped around curved surfaces.

2. Clearly mark the voltages in black lettering on orange colored tape backgrounds.

B. Conduit Wiring System Identification: 1. Provide companion type labeling markers to indicate the wiring system in each raceway

and consisting of a vinyl film substrate with a pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive backing. 2. Clearly mark the wiring systems in black lettering on orange colored tape backgrounds. 3. To properly identify each electrical system in the raceway, provide the following, or

similar, wording on the labeling markers corresponding to the systems: a. For electrical power systems, word the labels "POWER".

C. Conduit Feeder Identification: 1. Provide conduit feeder identification markers consisting of polymer-coated cloth tape with

a printable top coat and a rubber based pressure sensitive adhesive on the back to provide oil and water resistance, good print durability, and the flexibility to allow it to be wrapped around curved surfaces.

2. Provide conduit feeder identification labels that identify the feeder circuit with 3/4-inch high black lettering on yellow backgrounds.

D. Conduit and Raceway Label Dimensions: 1. Provide label color field lengths and lettering height as indicated in Table 26 05 23-1:

Table 26 05 23-1 Conduit and Raceway Label Sizes Raceway Outside Diameter

(Inches) Background Length

(Inches) Lettering Height

(Inches) 3/4 to 2 7 1

1-1/2 to 2 7 1 2-1/2 to 6 14 1-1/4

E. Product Examples: 1. Conduit Voltage Markers: Brady Worldwide, Inc., B-946 custom self-sticking pipe markers

or color code tape. 2. Conduit Wiring System: Brady Worldwide, Inc., B-946 custom self-sticking pipe markers

or color code tape. 3. Conduit Feeder Identification: Brady Worldwide, Inc., Product Number 31964.

2.05 DANGER WARNING LABELS:

A. Provide danger signage in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.145 and NFPA 70E. 1. For enclosures, provide signs with the caption “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT” 2. For fences, provide signs similar to the signs for enclosures, except provide dual

language sign captions in both Spanish and English and add Mister Ouch symbols. 3. For poles, provide dual language signs similar to the signs for fences, except add the

words “KEEP OFF”.

B. Product Examples: 1. Enclosure danger signs: Brady Worldwide, Inc Product Number 84083. 2. Fence Danger signs: Brady Worldwide, Inc Product Number 69737. 3. Pole danger signs: Brady Worldwide, Inc Custom markers.



2.06 MIMIC BUS:

A. Provide plastic mimic buses in accordance with the electrical equipment manufacturer's standard practice for the respective equipment. 1. Provide a plastic or plastic tape mimic that is resistive to acids, alkalis, alcohol, chemicals,

water, and weathering; and that does not come off after application without the use of a process designed specifically for the purpose. a. If using plastic tape, provide a type that has a selective sheathing, cloth backing, and

a pressure sensitive adhesive with paper backing, similar to Scotchlite Marking Film manufactured by 3M United States.

2. To indicate the various items of electrical equipment, use symbols that are similar to those used in an electrical one-line diagram.

3. Use the following standard colors for the buses indicated: a. For normal bus: Blue. b. For emergency bus: Red. c. For neutral bus: Yellow. d. For ground bus: Green.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing electrical identification items, verify with the Engineer that the data on each is correct.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Identification: 1. Identify wiring in conformance with the requirement s of Section 26 05 13 and Section 26

05 19.

B. Conduit and Raceway Identification: 1. Identify the wiring systems in conduit and raceway by providing companion type labeling

markers to indicate the systems in each. 2. Identify the Voltages carried in conduit and raceway by providing voltage labeling markers

on all accessible raceways. 3. Identify feeders by providing identification labels.

C. Electrical Box Identification: 1. For each pull box and junction box, if it is not otherwise indicated, install a laminated

phenolic identification nameplate with 1/8-inch black letters on a white background above or next to the box identifying its source of power; for example, indicate the panelboard and circuit number supplying power to a box with an identification nameplate.

2. For each device and outlet box used as a branch circuit junction or pull box provide a legible hand written panel designation and circuit number on exterior of box cover. Utilize a permanent black marker.

3. For above ground pull boxes and junction boxes, install nameplates adjacent to or above the item in a visible location. a. For NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250, fasten the

nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or an approved equal. b. For other than NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures, fasten the nameplate to the enclosure

using Seton number15660 adhesive or an approved equal. 4. For in-ground pull boxes and junction boxes, install nameplates adjacent to or above the

item in a visible location and inside the box immediately below the cover. a. For NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250, fasten the

nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or an approved equal.



D. Wiring Device Faceplate Labeling 1. Outside of faceplate:

a. On receptacle faceplates, provide a label indicating panel designation and circuit number. Utilize a thermal label maker device with clear label tape, font color shall be black and type shall be Arial.

2. Inside of faceplate: a. On receptacle and lighting control device faceplates, provide a legible hand written

panel designation and circuit number tag. Utilize a permanent black marker.

E. Electrical Equipment Identification: 1. Provide identification nameplates and an approved mimic bus on the front of the following

electrical equipment: a. Panelboards as specified in Section 26 24 13.

2. Install nameplates in the top center of the front face of the electrical equipment in a visible location. a. For NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 enclosures constructed as specified in NEMA 250, fasten

the nameplate to the enclosure using 316 stainless steel screws or an approved equal.

b. For other than NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures, fasten the nameplate to the enclosure using Seton number15660 adhesive or an approved equal.

3. Provide a manufacturer installed mimic bus; field installed mimic buses are not acceptable.

F. High Voltage Warning Signage: 1. Install high voltage warning signage on all personnel entry points to electrical rooms or

fenced electrical areas, and on all equipment enclosures within those spaces. a. Install high voltage warning signage on all fence gates and every 10 feet on the

prementiter fence around electrical areas. b. Install high voltage warning signage on both sides of all electrical poles.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 05 63-1 ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 63

ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of materials to performance test electrical systems and equipment. 1. Items Supplied Under This Section:

a. Electrical System Testing b. Thermographic Testing c. Ground System Testing d. Insulation Testing e. Equipment Testing f. Performance Test g. Test Procedure h. Test Report

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 – General Requirements 2. Division 26 Sections, As Applicable

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Documents and Testing Requirements of: 1. America National Standards Institute (ANSI): as applicable, including:

a. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code. b. ANSI Z244.1 American National Standards for Personnel Protection.

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): as applicable, including: a. NEMA ICS 2.3 - Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Motor Control Centers. b. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for selection,

Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems. c. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. d. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), as applicable. 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), as applicable, including:

a. IEEE C.57.13, IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), as applicable, including:

a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). b. NFPA 70E - Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. c. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code (NFAC).

6. International Electrical Testing Association (IETA) as applicable, including: a. Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems. 7. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA), as applicable. 8. State and Local Codes and Ordinances as applicable 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), as applicable, including: Title 29,

Parts 1907, 1910 and 1936. 10. International Electrical Testing Association (IETA) as applicable, including:

a. ATS-2013: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.



b. MTS-2011: Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation as required by this Section of the Contract to the Design Engineer in strict accordance with the provisions of Section 26 05 00 for review, comments and subsequent approval.

B. Submission to include the following: 1. Field inspection report as required for each item of material and/or equipment outlined

herein. 2. Manufacturer's directions for use of ground megger with proposed method indicated.

C. Test Reports: 1. Each test report prepared by the respective testing firm(s) comply, where applicable, to all

stipulations specified in Section 26 05 00 for Operation, Maintenance and Installation Manuals with reference to preparation, paper requirements, indexing and binders. Include in each test report the following: a. Summary of project. b. Description of equipment tested. c. Description of test. d. Test results. e. Conclusions and recommendations. f. Appendix, including appropriate test forms. g. Identification of test equipment used. h. Signature of responsible test organization authority. i. Furnish five copies of each completed report to the Design Electrical Engineer no

later than 30 days after completion of each test. Assemble and certify the testing firm each final test report, which must be submitted to the Design Engineer for review, comments and subsequent approval.


A. Qualifications of Testing Laboratory: Select an independent nationally recognized testing laboratory that is independent from electrical contractor that either is a member of The International Electrical Testing Association or meets the following qualifications: 1. Is nationally recognized as an electrical testing laboratory. 2. Has been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical systems and equipment for at least

2 years. 3. Is independent from the electrical contractor, the Owner, the Engineer and all other

contractors on the job. 4. Has at least one Professional Engineer on staff that is licensed in the State where the

project site is located. 5. Derives more than 75 percent of its income from electrical testing. 6. Owns or leases sufficient calibrated equipment to do the testing required. 7. Has a means to trace all test instrument calibration to The National Institute of Standards

and Technology.

B. Membership in the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) shall be considered evidence of meeting items A. 1. through and including A. 5

C. Testing shall be done under the supervision of a technician certified by International Electrical Testing Association or by technicians that are both certified by the National Society of Professional Engineers and experienced in electrical testing with 5 years of testing experience.



D. The testing laboratory shall supervise or perform all testing of equipment and oversee setting of all circuit breakers and calibration of all instruments.

E. The testing firm used must be approved by the Engineer.

F. Include the cost of such tests in the Contractors Bid Price for the applicable bid item.

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Field Inspection: 1. This Contractor is responsible for a complete inspection of all equipment, prior to testing

and energizing to ascertain that it is free from any damage, scratches, or missing components and that all power connections are correct, and that they are tight in conformance with recommended standard practice. The inspection is to also include a check of control wiring, terminal connections and all bolts and nuts.

2. Perform field inspection by this Contractor during a time when the Field Engineer and the Design Engineer are present to witness each inspection and its performance.

3. Correct any deficiencies found during the inspection by this Contractor prior to the energizing and testing of the equipment.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule all testing with work of other contractors to ensure an orderly sequence of startup and completion of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Perform, supervise, and furnish all test equipment needed to perform tests and provide safety measures, procedures and equipment required for each test.

B. Schedule all testing with the Engineer. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer except when the Engineer approves in writing conducting a specific test without the Engineer’s presence.

C. Notify all involved parties including the Engineer prior to tests, advising them of the test to be performed and the scheduled date and time.

D. Coordinate the tests with others involved.

E. Prepare written test procedures and forms used in the test reports and submit for approval prior to commencement of testing.

F. Include in each test report the following information: 1. Job title. 2. Date of test. 3. Equipment, system or cable identification. 4. Type of test. 5. Description of test instrument and date of latest calibration.



6. Section of specification defining test along with description of test and evaluations as reported by the testing company.

7. Test results (correct all readings at 20 degrees C). 8. Signature of person supervising test. 9. Signature of Contractor. 10. Space for Engineer's signature.

G. Refer to individual tests and inspections hereinafter specified for any additional or specified requirements.

H. Test Instrument Calibration: 1. The testing firm is to have a calibration program, which assures that all applicable test

instrumentation are maintained within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy is to be directly traceable to The National Institute of Standards and

Technology. 3. Instruments are to be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule.

a. Field Instruments: Analog - 6 months maximum Digital - 12 months maximum b. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months

4. Make dated calibration labels visible on all test equipment. 5. Keep records up-to-date, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested. 6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for each test

instrument. 7. Calibrating standard is to be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

I. Safety and Precautions: 1. Safety practices are to include, but are not limited to, the following requirements:

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970-OSHA. b. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council,

Chapter 4. c. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures. d. IETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program. e. Owner's safety practices. f. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E. g. ANSI Z244.1 American National Standards for Personnel Protection.

2. Perform all tests with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required.

3. The testing firm is to have a designated safety representative on the project to supervise

operations with respect to safety.

3.02 TESTING TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. Continuity Test: Make test for continuity and correctness of wiring and identification on all conductors installed.

B. Wire and Cable: 1. Test all wires and cables sized No. 2 and larger in accordance with NETA ATS-2013. 2. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical tests on all No. 4 and No. 6 power cables that

operate at voltages exceeding 150 volts to ground in accordance with NETA ATS-2013. 3. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical tests on all other wires and cables in

accordance with NETA ATS-2013. 4. Replace any wires which have been damaged.



5. Correct causes of all readings which do not meet the acceptable minimum insulation readings are as stated in NETA ATS-2013. Exceed the nominal expected temperatures for the actual load.

6. Retest items requiring correction.

C. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 1. Test all GFCI receptacles as specified in Section 26 27 16.

D. Lighting Tests 1. Emergency, standby, equipment and lighting test-trip all incoming utility power and

ascertain that all standby and emergency equipment operates. Replace and correct defective equipment. Operate battery systems for emergency lighting without power for 90 minutes and correct all defects and retest.

E. Visually and mechanically inspect and electrically test items as scheduled in attached schedule for equipment in attached schedule equipment as listed in attached schedule in using the procedures of NETA ATS-2013. When a test for a particular item is not called out in ATS, test using the procedures in NETA MTS-2011.

F. Furnish copies of complete lists of spare parts and special tools recommended for 2 years of normal operation of the complete system including the manufacturer's name, addresses, catalog numbers and prices.

3.03 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES

A. Report all unacceptable values immediately. Correct all deficiencies found in work of this contract and separately report deficiencies in work of items of other contracts. 1. Retest items requiring correction. Correct or have corrected any remaining deficiencies

and retest until work is acceptable.

3.04 RETESTING

A. After equipment has been in service for a period of nine months repeat the following tests: 1. Thermographic testing. Correct all causes of readings above the nominal expected

reading for the load encountered. 2. Insulation tests of all motors over 100 horsepower, switchgear, switchboards, and

transformers over 50 kVA.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 24 16-1 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section consists of all materials for furnishing, installing connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting wall-mounted panelboards.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results 2. Section 26 05 28 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B164 Nickel-Copper Alloy, Bar and Wire. 2. ASTM B187 Standard Specifications for Copper Bus, Bus Bar, Rod and Shapes

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 Electrical Enclosures. 2. NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 3. NEMA AB 2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application. 4. NEMA PB 1 Panelboards. 5. NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper installation, Operation, and Maintenance

of Panelboards.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 2. UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes 3. UL 67 Panelboards



1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Panelboards are connected to system voltages as follows: 1. 208Y/120 Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data or by a separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a written statement indicating why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Such statements are subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data for all products provided. Indicate clearly the usage and designation of each product.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all panelboards.

D. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for all panelboards.


A. Provide panelboards, which have been design tested in accordance with NEMA PB 1.

B. Provide panelboards which have been production tested in accordance with NEMA PB 1.

C. Conform all work to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

D. Install work under supervision of licensed electricians

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Basic Electrical Materials: Those products such as conduit, wireways, wire and connectors, cable, support devices, fasteners, and similar devices as required for work of this Section are as specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. Provide dead-front panelboards as follows: 1. Accommodate bolt-on molded case circuit breakers as specified below. 2. Conform to NEMA PB 1 and NFPA 70, Article 384. 3. Consist of interiors, matching enclosures and covers of a single manufacturer as specified

below. 4. Have circuit breakers of frame sizes, trip ratings, number of poles, and types as

scheduled, indicated and noted. 5. Provide branch circuits phased in sequence vertically and numbered uniformly left to right,

top to bottom.

B. Provide panelboards that are fully rated for a short circuit capacity as scheduled, indicated and noted on the Drawings.

C. Interiors: Provide interiors, as follows:



1. Provide tin plated main, ground and neutral copper buses conforming to ASTM B187 having not less than 98 percent conductivity.

2. Mount interiors on galvanized steel backplate. 3. Make provisions for future breakers and for circuit breakers in all future spaces as

indicated, scheduled or noted and so that additional breakers can be mounted without additional connectors or extension of busses.

D. Provide solderless type main, sub-feed, and through feed lugs rated for copper and aluminum conductors of size, number and type, as indicated, scheduled and noted on the Drawings.

E. Enclosures: 1. Provide enclosures conforming to NEMA 250 for the types as indicated, scheduled, noted,

and specified. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Fabricate from galvanized steel without knockouts. 3. Provide side, bottom, and top gutters of minimum 4-inch (10cm) width, of minimum 5-1/2

inch (14cm) depth, and sized as indicated, scheduled, and noted and as required by NFPA 70 Article 312 for the actual entry point.

4. Provide circuit directory of sufficient size to allow 40-characters per circuit; indicate the source of service (i.e. upstream panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) to the panelboard. Mount the directory in a transparent protective covering.

F. Doors: Provide doors as follows: 1. Provide concealed hinges and trim clamps. 2. Provide combination catch and master keyed, flat key lock with two keys for each lock and

common keying throughout each building of the facility.

G. Finishes: 1. Factory finish enclosure cover completely using an electro-deposition process that

deposits a complete finish coat of paint on all interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted joints.

2. Include in the paint process cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, prepaint and post paint rinses, bake-cure and cool down steps.

3. Finish switchboards with rust inhibiting primers and electro-disposition acrylic baked enamel top coating of No. 49 medium light grey conforming to ANSI Z55.1.

4. Provide overall finish capable of passing a 300-hour salt spray per ASTM B117 with less than 1/8 loss of paint from a scribed line.

H. Molded case circuit breakers: 1. Provide inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. 2. Provide trip ratings, frame sizes, and number of poles as indicated, scheduled, and noted

on the Drawings. 3. Provide full rated circuit breakers with short circuit ratings equal to the panelboard

installed as scheduled on the Drawings. 4. Provide molded case circuit breakers conforming to NEMA AB 1, and UL 489. 5. Provide circuit breakers of the same manufacture and type as the panelboard installed. 6. New circuit breakers for existing panelboards or loadcenters shall match the existing

circuit breaker type, manufacturer, and AIC rating. Circuit breakers that are added into existing equipment shall be new, unless noted on the drawings as existing to be relocated and/or reused; and shall be purchased from an authorized manufacturer’s distributor. Purchase of used, reconditioned, or brokered circuit breakers is prohibited unless approved by the Engineer.

I. Panelboard Types: 1. Branch Power and Lighting (208Y/120V) - Square D NQ.

J. Acceptable Manufacturers:



1. Square D Company 2. Eaton Electric 3. General Electric 4. Siemens Industry for LV Power Distribution 5. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Painted surfaces, which will be covered by items of this Section have a prime and finish coat of paint.

B. Ensure that all indoor areas are enclosed from the weather.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Space enclosures out from surfaces mounted on 1/4-inch (6mm) spacers or U-channel supports. Provide supports as specified in Section 26 05 28.

B. Install all panelboards and circuit-breakers in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Set enclosure top 6-feet 6-inches above finished floor or grade unless otherwise indicated or specified.

D. Punch holes for conduit entries in the enclosures.

E. In all areas except dry areas, install conduit drain fitting in punched hole in bottom of enclosure, conduit breather fitting in top of enclosure.

F. Interface with other work: 1. Connect conduits to enclosure with watertight hubs, except in damp locations on the

bottom of enclosures a sealing locknut may be used in place of watertight hubs, and in dry locations two locknuts and bushings may be used.

2. Connect wiring to line and load terminals with lugs provided or approved by manufacturer in conformance with Section 26 05 19. Remove interior or protect interior components during wire pulling.

3. Identify in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

G. At the end of the project update the circuit directories to reflect as-built conditions. Circuit directions shall be typed.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After wiring, vacuum out interior and wipe clean of all foreign material.

B. After painting in areas, remove all over paint, drips and splashes.


A. Site Testing: 1. Prior to Energizing:

a. Have insulation testing and setting of overcurrent protective device adjustments made in conformance of Section 26 05 63.



b. Ensure that all load side wiring is clear of shorts and has received and passed the insulation tests of Section 26 05 63.

c. Open all downstream disconnects and open circuit breaker.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. During painting, mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, and all items not to be painted.

B. Protect all items during work of other trades including welding and cutting.

C. Protect panelboards against overloads, short circuits, and improper operation, padlock off when work is being done on downstream circuits.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 27 26-1 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for furnishing, installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning, and

protecting wiring devices and cover plates.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 8. Section 26 05 33.23 – Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 20 - Standard for Safety for General-Use Snap Switches. 2. UL 231 - Standard for Power Outlets. 3. UL 498 - Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 4. UL 943 - Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. 5. UL 1203 - Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for

Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 6. UL 1449 - Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 7. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls. 8. UL 1681 - Standard for Safety for Wiring Device Configurations.

D. U. S. General Services Administration (GSA): 1. Federal Specifications:

a. W-C-596/40D - Connector, Receptacle, Electrical, General Purpose, Duplex, General Grade and Hospital Grade, Grounding, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, 20 Amperes, 125 Volts, 50/60 Hertz, Box Mount and Snap-In Mount.

b. W-C-596/41D - Connector, Receptacle, Electrical, General Purpose, Single, Hospital Grade, Grounding, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, 20 Amperes, 125 Volts, 50/60 Hertz.

c. W-C-596/107A - Connectors, Receptacle, Electrical, Special Purpose, Single, Grounding, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, 20 Amperes, 277 Volts, 50/60 Hertz.

d. W-S-896F - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification).



1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions for all items are as stated in NFPA 70 and the other references listed unless otherwise stated, specified, or noted.

B. SPDT: An acronym for single pole, double throw type electrical switches.

C. Wiring Devices: Yoke mounted switches and receptacles with indicated line ratings of 300 Volts and 30 Amperes or less.


A. Provide electrical power outlets designed in accordance with the requirements of UL 231 and UL 1681.

B. Product Data: 1. Submit a list of the products and accessories proposed to satisfy the requirements of this

Section. 2. Submit Product Data and catalog cuts of the materials and equipment proposed to be

used to satisfy the requirements of this Section. a. Clearly indicate the usage of each product on the submittal.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. List of the proposed materials. b. Catalog cuts of toggle handle snap switches. c. Catalog cuts of commercial specification grade receptacles. d. Catalog cuts of commercial specification grade GFCI receptacles. e. Catalog cuts of power outlet receptacles. f. Catalog cuts of device plates and covers.

2. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Test Reports.

1) Test reports for Site tests. b. Certificates.

1) Testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling. c. Manufacturers Instructions.

1) Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. d. Qualification Statements.

1) Qualifications of the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).


A. Qualifications: 1. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) Qualifications:

a. Employ an independent testing agency, qualified as specified in Section 26 05 63, Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems, to perform testing required by this Section.

b. Submit information verifying the ETL’s qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements:



1. Perform the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements specified in NFPA 70, and to all other applicable state, local, and national governing codes and regulatory requirements.


Factory Mutual, or certified as meeting the standards of UL by the Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) for the location installed in, and the application intended, unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not available or unless standards do not exist for the products. Provide copper conductors listed and labeled by UL for all wiring.

2. Submit evidence of testing agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling for each product with the submitted product data either by providing a printed mark on the data or by attaching a separate listing card. a. For items without such evidence, submit a written statement from the product


1.07 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Pack, ship, handle, and unload products in accordance with the requirements of Section

26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Acceptance at Site: 1. Accept products at the Site in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00,

Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store products in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 00, Common Work

Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use of Trade Names: 1. The use of trade names within the Contract Documents is intended to establish the basis

of design and to illustrate the constructability and level of quality required. 2. The use of trade names is not intended to exclude other manufacturers whose products

are equivalent to those named, subject to compliance with Contract requirements.

B. Provide the switches and receptacles of the same kind provided under this Contract from the same manufacturer; a mixture of manufacturers and products is unacceptable.


A. Switches: 1. Provide UL listed specification grade switches meeting the requirements of W-S-896F,

NEMA WD 1, and NEMA WD 6 for the voltage and current indicated, and having screw terminals.

2. Toggle Handle Snap Switches: a. Provide quiet design, 20 Amp rated, single pole, 3-way or 4-way, toggle handle snap

switches as indicated in the Contract Documents. b. Control Switches:



1) For control switches, provide SPDT switches with center OFF and maintained contacts, or SPDT with center OFF and momentary contacts, of the same basic type, construction, and rating as specified for other toggle handle snap switches.

2) Provide switch with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. 3) See the Contract Drawings for additional information.

c. Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell, www.hubbell-wiring.com.

a) Heavy Duty Specification Grade Switches: HBL1220 Series. b) Construction Series Heavy Duty Specification Grade Switches: CS120

Series. 2) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. 4) Approved equal.

B. Dimmer Switches: a. Provide slide type, solid-state, positive off dimmer switches that comply with the

requirements of UL 20 and UL 1472. 1) Provide fully rated dimmer switches rated for a minimum of 1500 Watts, provide

a larger size if necessary to accommodate the loads indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2) Provide dimmer switches rated for incandescent or fluorescent lighting as shown on the Contract Drawings, and capable of being gang mounted without breaking off their cooling fins.

3) Provide switch with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. b. Manufacturers:

1) Lutron, "Nova" Series, www.lutron.com. 2) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. 3) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. 4) Approved equal.

C. Receptacles: 1. Provide UL listed specification grade receptacles complying with the requirements of

W-C-596/40D, W-C-596/41D, W-C-596/107A, NEMA WD 1, and NEMA WD 6 for the voltage and current indicated, and having screw terminals. a. Provide receptacles complying with the terminal identification requirements of

UL 498. 2. Standard Face Design Receptacles:

a. Heavy Duty Specification Grade Receptacles: 1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex receptacles rated for 125 Volts

AC and 20 Amperes. 2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. 3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, HBL5352 Series, www.hubbell-wiring.com. b) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. c) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. d) Or Approved equal.

b. Construction Series Heavy Duty Specification Grade Receptacles: 1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex receptacles rated for 125 Volts

AC and 20 Amperes, and having a finder groove nylon face. 2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. 3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, 5362 Series, www.hubbell-wiring.com. b) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. c) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. d) Or Approved equal.



3. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: a. Heavy Duty Specification Grade GFCI Receptacles:

1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex GFCI receptacles rated for 125 Volts AC and 20 Amperes; having solid state circuitry; and that comply with the requirements of UL 498 and UL 943.

2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. 3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, GFR5362TR Series, www.hubbell-wiring.com. b) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. c) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. d) Approved equal.

b. Commercial Specification Grade GFCI Receptacles: 1) Provide 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding type duplex GFCI receptacles rated for 125

Volts AC and 20 Amperes; having solid state circuitry; and that comply with the requirements of UL 498 and UL 943.

2) Provide receptacles with terminals rated for both solid and stranded wire. 3) Manufacturers:

a) Hubbell, GFTR20 Series, www.hubbell-wiring.com. b) Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. c) Leviton Manufacturing Co., www.leviton.com. d) Approved equal.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Plates: 1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, provide AISI Type 302/304

stainless steel wall plates. a. For use with exposed stamped steel boxes and cast type boxes, provide heavy

cadmium-plated steel wall plates whose edges are flush with the edges of the associated boxes.

b. For pushbutton or buzzer outlet boxes, provide wall plates having openings to suit the pushbuttons or buzzers.

c. For locations subject to wet or rain conditions, provide wet location wall plates marked with the words “Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use”.

2. Thickness (Minimum): 0.040 inches thick (1mm). 3. Finish:

a. For finished areas, provide wall plates having a satin finish. b. For emergency circuits, provide either a red or Type 302/304 stainless steel wall

plate engraved with the word “EMERGENCY” and with the panel designation and circuit number.

4. Fasteners: a. For installing wiring devices and wall plates, provide the following of fastener types:

1) For affixing plastic wall plates, provide nylon screws. 2) For affixing metal wall plates, provide plated screws except as follows:

a) For other than dry locations, provide stainless steel hardware. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Hubbell, www.hubbell-wiring.com. b. Pass & Seymour, www.passandseymour.com. c. EGS/Appleton Electric, www.appletonelec.com. d. EGS/O-Z/Gedney, www.o-zgedney.com. e. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, http://crouse-hinds.com. f. Approved equal.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect the surfaces of concrete foundations where wiring devices will be mounted to verify that the surface is level and complete. 1. Verify that the required number of anchors of the correct type and size have been placed

in the proper locations. 2. Verify that there are no concrete spalls, honeycomb areas, or other concrete defects.

B. Verify that the pull and junction boxes installed are the correct type and size, and are at the correct location. 1. Verify that flush boxes are plumb and level to within 1/8-inches of vertical and horizontal;

and are either flush with the finish surface or protrude no more than 1/16 inch. 2. Verify that surface mounted boxes are plumb and level to within 1/16-inch of vertical and

horizontal. 3. Verify that the size of each box conforms to the requirements of Article 370 of NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wiring pigtails within installed boxes are sufficiently long to re-terminate the wiring twice and still allow 6 inches of slack.

D. Verify that ground wires are the correct type and size, and are at the correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Correct defects discovered during the examination 1. Remove any extraneous paint from the interior of boxes and from wiring. 2. Clean the interior of boxes to remove dirt and debris.

B. Provide outlet boxes and supports for wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33.23, Boxes, and Section 26 05 28, Hangers and Supports. 1. Mounting Locations and Heights:

a. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Contract Drawings, locate wiring devices by measuring the mounting heights from the finished floor to the centerline of the wiring device. 1) Electrical Duplex Convenience Outlets:

a) In Finished Areas: (1) Locate electrical duplex convenience outlets 18 inches above the

finished floor to the centerline of the outlet, unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

(2) In concrete block walls, locate convenience outlets so they fall at the top of the second course, and at the top center of the respective block in which they are placed.

(3) Locate electrical duplex convenience outlets that are above counters or backsplashes horizontally 6 inches above the counter or backsplash.

b) In Unfinished Areas: (1) Locate electrical duplex convenience outlets 36 inches above the

finished floor, unless this interferes with equipment or another obstacle.

(2) If locating electrical duplex convenience outlets 36 inches above the finished floor interferes with equipment or another obstacle; then install the outlet above or below the obstruction as directed by the Engineer.

c) For Water Coolers Receptacles:



(1) Locate electrical outlets for water coolers directly behind the water cooler in order to hide the cord and attachment plug.

(2) Prior to installing the box for the outlet, coordinate the mounting height of the wiring device with the height of the cooler to be installed to insure that the cord and attachment plug will be hidden.

2) Wiring Devices in Mill Work: a) Mount wiring devices in mill work where shown in details or elevations, or

as directed by the Engineer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring devices and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1. Submit the manufacturer's printed installation instructions to the Engineer for information. 2. Make connections to the devices in accordance with the requirements of Sections 26 05

19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors, and Section 26 05 33.13, Conduits for Electrical Systems.

3. Ground the devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 26.

B. Provide a wall plate for each switch, receptacle, and special purpose outlet. 1. If the Contract Drawings show two or more switches or receptacles at the same location,

gang these devices together and cover them with a single wall or cover plate. 2. For multi-gang boxes, provide multi-gang outlet plates; sectional gang plates are

unacceptable.

C. Identify the wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Label emergency power shut-off switches appropriately.


A. Correct the defects that are found in wiring devices during the specified inspections and tests, and retest the devices after correcting the defects.


A. Site Tests: 1. Test each receptacle with a plug-in tester that checks for reversed line and neutral wiring,

reversed ground and neutral wiring, open ground wiring, and open neutral wiring. 2. Verify that the GFCI receptacles work by using both the built-in integral tester and a plug-

in tester which simulates a ground fault to test all receptacles. 3. Test the last receptacle in each branch circuit to ensure that the neutral and ground wiring

resistance does not exceed 1 ohm between the receptacle and its panelboard.

B. Inspection: 1. Inspect boxes to verify proper operation, for visual appearance, and to verify correct

mounting height.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust the final position of switches and devices to be plumb and level, and set the final position of the wall plates for flush boxes flush to the wall.



3.07 CLEANING

A. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Clear and dispose of waste materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 26

05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Mask electrical devices to protect them from paint overspray or over-brushing during painting operations.

B. Protect electrical devices against damage from other work.

END OF SECTION


60654 / AACDPW 26 50 00-1 LIGHTING

SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for general and emergency egress lighting equipment, components, and

related installation.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding. 2. Section 26 05 28 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 63 – Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 5. Section 26 05 33.13 – Conduits for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA): 1. DAF-45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1. ANSI C81.64, Guidelines and General Information for Electrical Lamp Bases,

Lampholders and Gauges. 2. ANSI C81.64a, Electric Lamp Bases and Holders - Guidelines and General Information

for Electrical Lamp Bases, Lampholders and Gauges. 3. ANSI C82.1, Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 4. ANSI C82.1d, Electric Lamps – Paragraphs 5.3.3 and 5.5.3: Compact Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts. 5. ANSI C82.1e, Fluorescent Lamps – Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 6. ANSI C82.2, Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, Methods of Measurement of. 7. ANSI C82.2a, Fluorescent Lamps - Methods of Measurement. 8. ANSI C82.3, Fluorescent Lamp Reference Ballasts, Specifications for. 9. ANSI C82.11, High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 10. ANSI C82.11a, Lamp Ballasts - Specifications for High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts - Distance to Grounded Starting Aid. 11. ANSI C82.11b, Lamp Ballasts - Specifications for High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts - Line Transient Requirements. 12. ANSI C82.11c, Normative Annex A: Specifications for Low Voltage Control Interface for

Controllable Ballasts and Informative Index B: Specification for Nomenclature for Controllable Ballasts.

13. ANSI C82.12, Lamp Ballasts - Ballasted Adaptors. 14. ANSI C82.13, Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts - Definitions. 15. ANSI C82.77, Lamp Ballasts - Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power Quality

Requirements for Lighting Equipment.

C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 1. FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Federal Code of Regulation (CFR) Testing Standard for Electronic

Equipment

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):



1. IEEE C62.41; Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

E. Illuminating Society of North America (IESNA) 1. IESNA LM-79, Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products 2. IESNA LM-80, Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting

Sources 3. IESNA TM-15, Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires.

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. NEMA SSL 3, High Power White LED Binning for General Illumination

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

H. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 496, Standard for Safety of Edison-Base Lampholders. 2. UL 542, Standard for Safety of Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent

Lamps 3. UL 924, Standard for Safety of Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 4. UL 935, Standard for Safety of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. 5. UL 1598, Standard for Safety of Luminaires. 6. UL 1598B, Standard for Luminaire Reflector Kits for Installation on Previously Installed

Fluorescent Luminaires. 7. UL 1993, Standard for Safety of Self-Ballasted Lamps and Lamp Adapters. 8. UL 1994, Standard for Safety of Low Level Path marking and Lighting Systems 9. UL 2108, Standard of Safety of Low Voltage Lighting Systems.

I. U. S. Government: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Health and Safety Standards. b. 29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.

2. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): a. 47 CFR 18 Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment.

3. Department of Energy (DOE): 1) The Energy Policy of 2005, Public Law 109-58.


A. Design Criteria: 1. The Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings constitutes the basis of the

lighting design for this Contract, but may not indicate the special design details required. a. The Lighting Fixture Schedule includes the lighting fixture descriptions, fixture

manufacturers, and corresponding model numbers. b. The lighting fixtures as scheduled meet the requirements of the lighting design for

this Contract with respect to the visible style, number of lamps, and lenses desired. 2. Provide lighting fixtures meeting the requirements of the basis of the lighting design for

this Contract, and which have the special details specified in this Section. a. Submit Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions to show details of

assemblies and sub-assemblies, and specially-fabricated supporting and fastening devices.

b. Submit bills of material for the fixtures and their appurtenances. 1) Reference the bills of material to the Shop Drawings. 2) Provide bills of material consisting of itemized lists of the parts required (i.e.

ballast capacitor igniter, and other similar item descriptions).



3) Identify each part with a part number and/or manufacturer number. c. Provide fixtures for exterior installation that are designed to be completely

waterproof. d. Provide luminaire brackets designed to be compatible with configuration of the

luminaire.

B. Prior to providing light fixtures substituted for the fixtures identified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawings, submit the following information to obtain the Engineer’s approval to substitute the fixtures: 1. The manufacturer’s catalog cuts indicating the type, design, dimensions, mounting

arrangement, and other industry standard lighting fixture information. a. Describe the lighting fixtures, exit signs, emergency battery units, and

appurtenances. 2. Manufacturer’s photometric data, distribution curves, isolux charts, glare factor data, and

coefficient of utilization. 3. Complete photometric data for the fixture, including optical performance, completed by an

independent testing laboratory developed according to the standards of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America as follows: a. For direct, direct/indirect and indirect lights used for general illumination:

1) Coefficients of utilization. 2) Candlepower data, presented graphically and numerically, in 5 degree

increments (5 degree, 10 degree, 15 degree, etc.). Data developed for up and down quadrants of normal, parallel, and at 22-1/2 degree, 45 degree, 67-1/2 degree planes to lamp(s). If light output is asymmetric, provide additional planes as required to complete report.

3) Zonal lumens stated numerically in 10 degree increments (5 degree, 15 degree, etc.) as above.

4) Average luminaire luminance calculated in the lengthwise, crosswise, and 45 degree vertical planes.

b. For exterior roadway, area, or floodlighting luminaires, photometric data shall include isocandela charts, coefficient of utilization, IES roadway distribution classification (where applicable), and isofootcandle plots for the specific mounting heights, lamps, and conditions of the project.

C. Submit a complete lamp inventory for approval, including specific lamp type, manufacturer, and all appropriate lamp criteria including but not limited to: life, initial and mean lumens, beam spread, candlepower, lamp envelope, base type, color temperature, and color rendering index.


A. Regulatory Requirements: a. The execution of work of this Section must satisfy the applicable requirements of the

latest edition of NFPA 70 (NEC), the National Occupational Safety and Health Act as embodied in 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, and regulations of local jurisdictional authorities.

2. Comply with the requirements of the Energy Policy Act (EPACT) of 2005 and the applicable version of the International Energy Conservation Code.

B. Certifications: 1. All products must be Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed; and each fixture, Emergency

Battery Unit, and exit sign must bear the UL label. a. The UL standards appropriate for the products specified are listed in Paragraph

1.02.E. b. Alternatively, Listing by an OSHA Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)

to the relevant UL standards is permitted.



2. Fixtures that are to be installed in areas subject to the weather must be UL listed as "Enclosed and gasketed suitable for wet locations".

3. Provide lighting fixture ballasts certified by the Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM) or its successor organization to be in accordance with standard ballast specifications established by ANSI as listed in Paragraph 1.02.A.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Submittal Procedures: 1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts. 1) Lighting fixtures catalog cuts 2) Ballast catalog cuts that include specific ballast information with sufficient

information to show compliance with Contract Documents. 3) Lamp catalog sheets of each lamp type for approval, including specific lamp

type, manufacturer, and all appropriate lamp criteria including but not limited to: life, initial and mean lumens, beam spread, candlepower, lamp envelope, base type, color temperature, and color rendering index

b. Manufacturer’s photometric data, distribution curves, isolux charts, glare factor data, and coefficients of utilization for each lighting fixture type.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Shop Drawings. b. Bills of material.

3. Quality Assurance/Quality Control Submittals: a. Design Data:

1) Calculations demonstrating that substituted fixtures are equivalent to the named fixtures.

b. Certificates: 1) Proof that equipment furnished has the required Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

listing. 2) Ballast certifications.

c. Manufacturer’s Instructions: 1) Manufacturer’s installation instructions.


A. Lamps: 1. For the lighting fixtures furnished, provide an additional 10 percent of each lamp type

specified over the quantity required to initially lamp the fixtures furnished.

B. Maintenance Tools: 1. Provide two each of the special maintenance tools as may be necessary for re-lamping

fixtures and for fixture maintenance.

C. As the equipment for which the extra materials can be used is substantially completed, turn the extra materials for that equipment over to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Conduit and Raceway: 1. Provide electrical conduit and raceway in accordance with the requirements of Section 26

05 33.13 as indicated and as appropriate for the application per NFPA 70.



B. Fixture Support Devices and Fasteners: 1. In addition to the supporting devices and fasteners specified in Section 26 05 28, provide

suspension accessories, canopies, casing, sockets, holders, reflectors, plaster frames, recessing boxes, and similar items required to support the lighting equipment and luminaries as specified or indicated.

C. Wire and Cable: 1. Provide electrical wire and cable in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05

19.


A. Light Fixtures: 1. Provide those fixtures indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract

Drawings or approved substitutions. a. The manufacturers’ fixture descriptions and corresponding fixture model numbers are

also listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. b. Additional manufacturers who can provide products comparable to those provided by

the manufacturers listed and whose products the Contractor proposes to use for this Contract must first be submitted to and receive the approval of the Engineer prior to being substituted for the listed manufacturers.

2. Fixture Grounding Device and Conductor: a. Provide the housing of each fixture with a separate, factory-installed grounding

device and ground conductor. 3. Exterior Fixtures:

a. Factory-equip fixtures intended for exterior installation with waterproof gaskets and anodized aluminum frames unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings. 1) Provide outlet boxes, neoprene gaskets, and stainless steel hardware to render

the exterior fixture installation waterproof. b. Finish:

1) Provide fixtures for exterior installation with a finish free of scratches and other surface blemishes.

c. Brackets: 1) Provide brackets of the type and style indicated or scheduled on the Contract

Drawings and color matched to the light fixture.

B. Lamps: 1. Provide the proper type of lamps for the lighting fixtures scheduled on the Contract

Drawings or indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. a. Match the voltages of fluorescent and HID lamps to installed fixtures. b. Provide lamps having the proper type of sockets to suit the fixtures provided.

2. Basis of design lamp characteristics: a. Fluorescent T5 Lamps: low mercury content, T5 lamps having a minimum CRI of 85,

color temperature of 3500K, and suitable for operation with electronic ballasts or as otherwise specified. Minimum expected life (w/ 12 hour start) shall be 36,000 hours.Compact Fluorescent Lamps: minimum CRI of 82, color temperature of 3500K, suitable for operation with electronic ballasts or as otherwise specified. Minimum expected life (w/ 12 hour start) shall be 20,000 hours. Compact Fluorescent lamps that are to be dimmed shall be coordinated with the dimming ballast manufacturer and shall be supplied with pin configuration per the manufacturer.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Electric (Basis of Design) www.gelighting.com

a) Ecolux series for T5/T8 lamps b) SPX series for Compact Fluorescent



Osram Sylvania www.sylvania.com 2) Philips www.usa.lighting.philips.com

C. Lighting Fixture Ballasts: 1. Provide UL listed and certified lighting fixture ballasts that meet the requirements of the

National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 1988 and all amendments thereto. 2. Provide lighting fixture ballasts in accordance with the requirements of the standard

ballast specifications established by ANSI. a. Fluorescent Ballasts:

1) Provide lighting fixtures equipped with electronic program rapid start type ballasts.

2) Ballasts to be UL listed, Class P, program rapid start, input current total harmonic distortion not to exceed 10 percent, be of the low noise level, multi-lamp capacity, to have an average lamp current crest factor of 1.7, a power factor of 90 percent or above, to have a frequency of operation of 42 KHz or greater and be stroboscopic corrected.

3) Ballasts shall comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 4) Ground ballasts in accordance with NEC and provide in-fixture automatic

resetting thermal protection for ballasts and capacitors. 5) Ballast shall provide lamp end of life protection circuit which meets NEMA

recommendations. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers:

a) Philips Advance www.advance.philips.com b) General Electric www.gelighting.com c) Universal Lighting Technologies www.unvlt.com

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to ordering flush mounted or lay-in type lighting fixtures, verify their locations and clearances, and coordinate with other construction work to verify that the fixtures will fit without interferences. 1. The Engineer assumes no responsibility for clearance, dimensions, tolerances, or exact

hanging frame dimensions.

B. Prior to beginning installation of the lighting fixtures and accessories, verify that all other work affecting the installation of the lighting fixtures and accessories is complete to the extent that the light fixtures may be installed over substrates or incorporated into integrated systems without adversely affecting the lighting or other construction.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble lighting fixtures if required; and install and wire the lighting fixtures, supports, brackets, and accessories at the locations and mounting heights indicated on the Contract Drawings. 1. Wire the lighting fixtures and accessories as specified in Section 26 05 19. 2. Ground the lighting fixtures in accordance with the requirements of Article 410 of NFPA

70 (NEC) and Section 26 05 26. a. Use the fixture grounding device to connect a separate grounding conductor in

compliance with requirements specified in Section 26 05 26. 3. Install all photoelectric controls facing north for proper operation.

B. Recessed Fixture Installation:



1. Support recessed fixtures on the ceiling system’s structural elements rather than its surface materials such as tiles, plaster, drywall, or similar surfaces. a. Use the mounting yokes furnished with the fixtures and, where required, the supports

specified in Section 26 05 28. 2. If the fixture is to be installed in modular tile ceilings, locate the fixture in the center of the

ceiling panel unless indicated otherwise. a. Refer to the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan included in the Contract Drawings

for modular tile ceiling layouts. 3. If light leaks through gaps between the recessed fixture trim and the adjacent surface,

install suitable sealing gaskets.

C. Exposed Fixture Installation: 1. Install surface mounted and exposed fixtures as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

a. Hang suspended fixtures plumb, with continuous rows of fixtures in alignment. b. Mount suspended fixtures in each room or area at the same height regardless of

varying clear height conditions unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. c. Install surface mounted fixtures tight up against the substrate to eliminate gaps

except where NFPA 70 (NEC) or local code restrictions require a separation between the fixtures and substrate.

2. Exit Fixture Installation: a. Install exit fixtures for doors directly over the doorways as indicated on the Contract

Drawings b. Center the fixtures over the doorways, and install the fixtures to clear the door and

associated hardware.

3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

A. Verify the locations and clearances of other installed or proposed work, and coordinate lighting fixture installations accordingly.

B. Coordinate the installation of lighting fixtures with all building systems and components to avoid any installation conflicts.


A. Inspect, test, and certify lighting and the associated electrical distribution system and equipment in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 63.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean new lighting fixtures by following the cleaning procedures as recommended by the fixture manufacturer: 1. Use only those products for cleaning as recommended in the fixture manufacturer's

literature.

END OF SECTION